You can now find video tutorials for Blender

Basics on line for each chapter. Visit:

http://www.cdschools.org/blenderbasics

Look for the video link on the page to take you

to the YouTube channel.

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International

License.

2004, 2006, 2009, 2011, 2017 fifth edition by James Chronister. This document may be reproduced in
whole or in part without permission from the author. Feel free to use this manual for any and all
educational applications. I enjoy emails from other educators, so please let me know how youre using
the book. You may not bundle this tutorial with any software or documentation that is intended for
commercial applications (marketing for a profit) without expressed written approval from the author.
Inquiries and comments can be directed to [email protected]. This document, and other
information, can be found at http://www.cdschools.org/blenderbasics . At this site, look under
Academics in Technology Education.

Information regarding the Blender program and development can be found at www.blender.org. Blender
users can also find information on how to use the program at www.blenderartists.org. Daily Blender
news and tutorial links can be found at www.blendernation.com.
 Table
Table of
of Contents
Contents
Introductory Items
v Introduction
vi Rendering and Animation Basic Concepts
viii Basic Key Commands
Chapter 1- The Blender Interface
1-1 The Blender Screen
1-2 Viewport (Window) Types
1-3 The User Preferences Window
1-4 Open, Saving and Appending Files
1-5 Packing Data
1-6 Importing Objects (from other file formats)
Chapter 2- Working with Viewports (windows)
2-1 Moving Around in 3D Space
2-2 Window and Button Control
2-3 Creating Viewports
Chapter 3- Creating and Editing Objects
3-1 Working with Basic Meshes
3-3 Using Main Modifiers to Manipulate Meshes
3-5 Edit Mode- Mesh Editing
3-7 The Tool Shelf
3-9 Proportional Editing
3-17 Joining/Separating Meshes, Boolean Operations
Chapter 4- Blender Render Engines
4-1 The Classic Render Engine
4-3 The Cycles Render Engine
4-8 Tweaking Cycles for Speed & Quality
Chapter 5- Materials and Textures
5-1 Basic Material Settings
5-4 Basic Texture Settings
5-7 Using Images and Movies as Textures
5-9 Displacement Mapping
5-10 Materials and Textures in Cycles
Chapter 6- Setting Up a World
6-1 Using Color, Mist and Textures
6-4 Using an Image in the Background
6-5 Cycles World Settings
Chapter 7- Lighting and Cameras
7-1 Camera Settings and Options
7-2 Using Nodes for Depth-of-Field, Green Screen (Chroma Key), and More
7-7 Lighting Types and Settings
7-9 Indirect Lighting
Chapter 8- Render Settings
8-1 Basic Setup Options
8-4 Rendering Movies and Images
8-5 Network Rendering
Chapter 9- Ray-Tracing (mirror, transparency, shadows)
9-1 Lighting and Shadows
9-2 Reflection (mirror) and Refraction (transparency)
Chapter 10- Animation Basics
10-1 Basic Key-framing and Auto Key-framing
10-3 Working with the Graph Editor and Dope Sheet
10-7 Animating Materials, Lamps and World Settings (and more)

i
Table of Contents (continued)
Chapter 11- Adding 3D Text
11-1 Blender 3D Text Settings
11-2 Converting to a Mesh
Chapter 12- NURBS and Meta Shape Basics
12-1 Using NURBS to create lofted shapes
12-2 Liquid and droplet effects using Meta Shapes
Chapter 13- Modifiers
13-1 Basic Mesh Modifiers
13-6 Simulation Modifiers
Chapter 14- Particle Systems and Interactions
14-1 Particle Settings and Material Influence (Cycles)
14-7 Using the Explode Modifier
14-8 Particle Interaction With Objects and Forces
14-9 Using Particles for Hair and Grass
Chapter 15- Child-Parent Relationships
15-1 Using Child-Parented Objects
15-2 Adjusting Object Centers (pivot points)
Chapter 16- Working With Constraints
16-2 Tracking To An Object
16-4 Following Paths and Curves
Chapter 17- Armatures (bones and skeletons)
17-1 Using Armatures to Deform Meshes
17-4 Creating Vertex Groups
17-5 Using Inverse Kinematics (IK) and Other Constraints
Chapter 18- Relative Vertex Keys (shape keys)
18-1 Creating Mesh Keys
18-3 Using Action Editor Sliders
Chapter 19- Object Physics
19-1 Creating Fabric and Fluid Effects with Interactions
19-10 Realistic Object Interactions in Real-Time and Animations
Chapter 20- Creating Springs, Screws, Gears and other Add-On Shapes
20-1 Duplicating Meshes to Create Screws and Gears
20-4 Using Mesh Editing to Create Revolved Shapes
20-5 Blender Add-On Meshes
Chapter 21- Video Motion Tracking
21-1 Setting Up the Tracking Scene
21-8 Using Masks and Materials
Chapter 22- Game Engine Basics (real-time animation)
22-1 Setting Up The Physics Engine
22-5 Applying Materials
22-5 Using Game Physics in Animation
22-6 Using Logic Blocks
Chapter 23- UV Texture Mapping
23-1 Using Basic Mapping
23-3 GLSL Shading
Chapter 24- Video Sequence Editor
24-1 Producing a Movie From Individual Clips and Images
24-5 Adding an Audio Track
Chapter 25- 3D Printing Tools
25-1 Fundamentals of 3D Printing
25-2 Using Blender to Create 3D Printer Models
25-3 Exporting Models
Educational Standards Alignment
Index
ii
 Performance
Practice Exercises
Tasks
Chapter 1
Setting Up Your Interface ............................................................................................. 1-7
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 1-8
Chapter 2
Multiple Viewport Configuration ................................................................................. 2-5
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 2-6
Chapter 3
Create a Sculpture ....................................................................................................... 3-4
Modeling a Landscape and Lighthouse .................................................................... 3-11
Adding Windows to the Lighthouse ............................................................................ 3-19
Challenge Task: Creating a 3D Logo .......................................................................... 3-20
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 3-22
Chapter 4
Test Renderings ......................................................................................................... 4-9
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 4-10
Chapter 5
Adding Classic Materials & Textures to the Lighthouse Scene..................................... 5-15
Challenge Task: Cycles Shading for the Lighthouse Scene ..................................... 5-23
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 5-24
Chapter 6
Creating an Environment for Your Scene ................................................................... 6-10
Challenge Task: A Sculpture Environment ................................................................. 6-12
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 6-12
Chapter 7
Lighting Up the Landscape Scene .............................................................................. 7-10
Challenge Task: Cycles Scene and Blur ..................................................................... 7-12
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 7-14
Chapter 8
Saving a Picture of Your Scene ................................................................................... 8-8
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 8-8
Chapter 9
Reflection and Refraction ............................................................................................ 9-3
Challenge Task: Cycles Reflection and Refraction ................................................... 9-5
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 9-6
Chapter 10
Adding Motion to Your Scene...................................................................................... 10-8
Challenge Task: A Logo or Sculpture in Motion ........................................................ 10-11
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 10-12
Chapter 11
Company Logo ............................................................................................................. 11-3
Challenge Task: Production Logo ............................................................................... 11-4
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 11-4
Chapter 12
The Lava Lamp .............................................................................................................. 12-3
Challenge Task: The Spill .......................................................................................... 12-6
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 12-6

iii
iii
Practice Exercises
Performance Tasks
Chapter 13
Common Modifiers Exercise........................................................................................ 13-8
Challenge Task: Insect Study .................................................................................. 13-9
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 13-10
Chapter 14
Adding Rain to Your Scene.......................................................................................... 14-14
Challenge Task: A Fireworks Display& Candle ......................................................... 14-15
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 14-16
Chapter 15
The Robotic Arm ............................................................................................................ 15-3
Challenge Task: A Simple Character ......................................................................... 15-4
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 15-4
Chapter 16
A Camera That Follows the Arm .................................................................................. 16-3
Challenge Task: A Simple Roller Coaster ................................................................... 16-6
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 16-8
Chapter 17
Create a Hand With Armatures ................................................................................... 17-6
Challenge Task: Flubber Character ............................................................................ 17-8
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 17-10
Chapter 18
Cheesy Actor Monkey ................................................................................................. 18-5
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 18-6
Chapter 19
A Waving Flag ............................................................................................................... 19-3
Making a Splash With Fluids ........................................................................................ 19-9
Challenge Task: Rube Goldberg Invention ............................................................... 19-11
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 19-12
Chapter 20
Turning Gears ................................................................................................................ 20-6
Challenge Task: An Animated Spring ......................................................................... 20-7
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 20-8
Chapter 21
Composite Desk Scene ............................................................................................... 21-9
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 21-10
Chapter 22
A Simple Maze Runner ................................................................................................ 22-11
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 22-12
Chapter 23
Creating a Texture Wrap ............................................................................................. 23-5
Challenge Task: Texture Your Maze ........................................................................... 23-6
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 23-6
Chapter 24
Video Portfolio .............................................................................................................. 24-6
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 24-6
Chapter 25
Chess Piece .............................................................................................................. 25-5
Unit Reflection ............................................................................................................... 25-6

iv
 Introduction
Introduction
About Blender

How can Blender be free?

People usually associate freeware software with the terms bad, with limited features
or just a demo. Blender is fully functional. It works as an open-sourced, community
development program where people from around the world contribute to its success.
Blender is a rendering\animation\game development open-sourced freeware
program maintained by the Blender Foundation and can be downloaded, free of
charge, from www.blender.org. The goal of the foundation can be summarized as
follows:
The Blender Foundation is an independent organization (a Dutch stichting), acting
as a non-profit public benefit corporation, with the following goals:
1. To establish services for active users and developers of Blender.

2. To maintain and improve the current Blender product via a public accessible source code system
under the GNU GPL license.

3. To establish funding or revenue mechanisms that serve the foundations goals and cover the
foundations expenses.

4. To give the worldwide Internet community access to 3D technology in general, with Blender as a core.
Blender website (blender.org)

Blender can be a difficult program to learn with limitless possibilities. What do you teach
in the time you have to teach? Thats a tough question because you cant teach it all.
This tutorial book is designed to get you up and running in the basics of creating objects
and scenes and animating. The best advice I can give you about learning this program
is Dont Give Up! All rendering and animation programs have a tough learning curve.
After a few weeks, things get easier. This tutorial has been developed to be used in
conjunction with daily lesson planning and demonstrations. Because of this, some areas
of Blender have not been described as fully as they could be. If you are using this guide
as a stand-alone teaching or self-help tool, you may need to seek additional help
from reputable places like www.blender.org and www.blenderartists.org to make sense
of things. These sites give you access to help forums and tutorials. There are literally
thousands of Blender users world-wide that browse the forums to give and get advice.
Make use of that vast knowledge base!

Version Information:
The current release at the time of this printing is version 2.78. Since Blender is developed
by a worldwide pool of individuals giving freely of their time, releases happen often.

New for this edition:

While most of the activities here use the classic render engine due to classroom time
constraints (cycles rendering is very time intensive), a unit (and more) has been added
for the cycles render engine. There are also new challenge tasks for those students that
are looking for extra, or alternate, activities. Reference to education standards,
reflective writing, motion tracking, and 3D printing have also been added.

v
Rendering and Animation
Rendering and Animation Basics

RENDERING:

A rendering is a pictorial output of a 3D scene or object. Features like materials,

lighting, oversampling and shadows control the effects and quality of the
rendering. The more of these features you add, the more realistic your scene
become, but also lengthens rendering times.

Materials and Textures:

You can control the way an object appears by applying color and textures.
Materials provide realism with added effects. You an control glossiness
(specular), self-emitting lighting characteristics, transparency and pattern
repetition. Ray-tracing can provide reflection (mirror) and refraction
(transparency) effects. Textures can be made from any scanned photograph or
drawn object in an image-editing or painting-type program. Images in almost
any format (jpg, bitmap, png) can be used. Blender also has many built-in
texture generators that can simulate a variety of surface characteristics such as
wood, marble, clouds, waves and surface roughness.

Lighting:

Lighting provides the realism to your scene through reflections and shadows. You
can control the type of light, intensity and color. Some lights can give a fog or
dusty look with a halo or volume lighting effect. Illumination distances can also
be set.

Cameras:

Your camera is your point-of-view for the scene. Just like a real camera, you can
control lens length to achieve close-ups or wide angles. Clipping distance can
also be set to control how far and near the camera sees. Depth-of-field can
be controlled using nodes.

ANIMATION:

An animation is a series of rendered images that form a movie. The quality of

your movie is controlled by all of the above mentioned features including frames
per second (fps), output size, file type and compression. The most common
method of animation is called key-framing. Key frames are created at various
points in the animation while the computer generates all of the transition frames
between the two keys. Basic animation options include changing size, rotation
and location of objects.

vi
 Rendering
Rendering and
and Animation
Animation
Time Factors:

In order to animate, you must first set the length of your animation in frames and your
frames per second (fps). The length in time can be calculated from these.

Frame Rate Options:

NTSC- U.S. and Japan video standard of 30 fps
Film- Movie standard of 24 fps
PAL- European video standard of 25 fps

*We typically use a frame rate of 25-30 fps depending on computer speed or if we plan
to save the file to DVD. Hit the PAL or NTSC setting buttons for these.

Creating Keys:

A key is placed at the beginning and end of a desired move, size change or rotation of
an object. Think in terms of how long you want a change to occur and relate it to your
fps. For example, if you want an object to move from point A to point B in 2 seconds
and you have 30 fps, place 2 keys 60 frames apart.

Following Paths and Objects:

In most animation programs, a camera can follow a path or object (or both) as it
moves. This feature saves a lot of animation time and reduces the number of keys
needed.

Output Options:

We typically save our movies in MPEG format for Windows. This type of file plays easily
on most media players and at a high quality. Depending on how you plan to use your
movie (i.e. on the web, saved to DVD, played in a presentation), you may wish to use
different formats. Examples include Apple Quicktime and Windows AVI formats.
Different formats also allow you to adjust the quality settings. For example, AVI formats
can be compressed using a variety of compressors called CODECs.

Rendering sizes:

Animations are saved in a measurement unit called a pixel. Your computer and TV
screens display images as small dots. The more dots, or pixels, per inch, the higher the
resolution. Modern displays and TVs use square pixels, but older TV sets used rectangular
pixels. This made it somewhat more difficult to render images because the output from
3D animation programs needed to be compressed into a non-square ratio format.
Since most TVs have been replaced by modern flat screens, we can begin to get away
from these older, confusing ratios and work with 1:1 pixel ratios.

vii
vii
Basic Key Commands
Rendering and Animation
The next considerations deal with render sizes:

1. The older TV standard of 4:3 ratio size or the newer TV (and film)16:9 ratio size.
2. Standard Definition (SD) or High Definition (HD).

This decision will most likely be controlled by the type of result you need and how much
time you have to render the project. Until recently, we have always worked with DVD
standard definition 4:3 renderings in the classroom. We are changing most of our
projects to HDTV 720p to better fit modern TVs and online video postings. While high
definition renderings can produce better projects, the cost in rendering times would
make it almost impossible for us to complete projects in the classroom during the school
day, even with the small render farm we have in the lab. Standard definition still looks
great played back on modern TVs and renders at a fraction of the time of higher HD.
Here are the frame sizes for each type of render:

Real-Time Animation and Physics:

Blender uses the Bullet physics engine to make objects react in your scene like they
would in real life. The Bullet physics engine was used in movies like 2012 to create all of
the realistic-looking animations of falling and reacting objects. Real-time animation
allows you to add physical properties to your objects and use the keyboard and other
features to control them. You can create actors, change masses, control dampening
(friction), set force and torque in x, y, and z planes and create relationships with other
objects within the scene. With time and practice, interesting 3D games, animations,
and real-time architectural walk-throughs can be created.

Blender allows you to use the physics engine to create animation tracks. You can now
use the physics to create realistic falling, rolling, etc. animations and use them in
movies.
viii
 Basic
Basic Key
Key Commands
Commands
Basic Blender Commands
This is just a partial list of Blender commands. Please visit the Blender.org website for more details.

TAB key- Toggles between edit mode (vertex editing) and object select mode. If youre in
edit mode when you create a new object, it will be joined to the selected object.
Ctrl Z- The global UNDO command. With each press, one step will be undone (up to 32
steps possible by default). If in edit mode, it will only undo editing steps on the
selected object.
Space Bar- Brings up a search window to find basic commands.
Z key- Toggles view from wireframe to solid.
Alt Z- Toggles a texture/shaded view.
R key- Rotates an object or selected vertices. (pressing X,Y,Z after R will limit effect)
S key- Scales a selected object or vertices. (pressing X,Y,Z after S will limit effect)
G key- Grabs or moves the object or selected vertices. (pressing X,Y,Z after G limits effect)
A key- While in edit mode its good for selecting all vertices for commands like remove
doubles and subdivide. Pressing A twice will clear selected and reselect.
Alt A- Plays animation in selected window. Your cursor must be in that window for it to play.
Ctrl A- After an object has been re-sized and/or rotated, this can reset the objects data to
1 and 0.
W key- Brings up a Specials menu while in edit mode of specific edit mode options.
Shift-D- Duplicates or copies selected objects or selected vertices.
E key- While in edit mode, selected vertices can be extruded by pressing E.
O key- The O key (not zero) will put you into proportional vertex editing while in edit
mode. Proportional editing now also works in object mode.
B key- Gives you a box (window drag) to select multiple objects. In edit mode, works the
same to select multiple vertices.
C key- Gives you a circle select in edit mode that can be sized by scrolling the mouse
wheel. Press LMB to select, press wheel to deselect. Right mouse click or Esc to exit.
Shift-A- Brings up the tools menu where you can add meshes, cameras, lights, etc.
Number Pad- Controls your views. 7 top, 1 front, 3 side, 0 camera, 5 perspective, .
zooms on selected object, + and zoom in and out. The + - buttons also control
affected vertices size in proportional vertex editing.
Mouse- Left to manipulate (LMB), right to select (RMB), center wheel to zoom and rotate
view. If you hold down shift and center wheel you can pan around on the screen.
Shift Key- Hold down the shift key to make multiple selections with the right mouse button.
Arrow Keys-Used to advance frames in animation. Left/right goes 1 frame at a time, up/down
goes 10 frames at a time.
P key- While in edit mode, pressing P will seperate selected verticies. In object mode,
pressing P will cause you to enter into the game (real-time) mode. Press Esc to exit
game mode.
ATL/CTRL P-Creates or breaks child/parent relationships. To create C/P relationships, hold down
shift key and select child first, then parent. Hit Ctrl P. To clear a relationship, do the
same except hit Alt P.
U key- In Object Mode, brings up the Single-User menu to unlink materials, animations
(IPOs), etc. for linked or copied objects.
M key- Moves selected objects to other layers.
Ctrl M- Mirrors an object. Select M, then X,Y,or Z to mirror on that axis.
N key- Brings up the numeric info. on a selected object (location, rotation and size). Info.
can then be changed in the panel.

ix
Practice Exercises
Ctrl J- Joins selected objects together.
Ctrl L- Link mesh's data to another mesh. Good for copying materials and other object
data from one object to other objects. While holding the Shift key, select all the
objects with the one containing the material or other data last. Press Ctrl-L and
select you option.
F key- Makes a face in edit mode of the selected vertices. You can only select 3-4 vertices
at a time to make a face. By selecting 2 verticies and pressing F will close shape.
Alt F- Will Face or Fill a closed set of selected verticies.
Ctrl F- Brings up a Face Specials menu with other face options.
Shift F- Camera Flying is enabled and will cause the camera to fly through the scene.
X or Delete- Delete selected objects, vertices or faces.
K-LMB In edit mode, K and left mouse button will allow you to slice faces.
Ctrl R- In edit mode, will bring up options to slice or cut faces.
Shift- S In both edit and object modes, this will give you options to locate objects or the
cursor to assist in precise placement.
Function Keys-F1-Load File; F2-Save File; F3-Repeat History; F11-Last Render; F12-Render
I Key- The I key is used to insert animation keys for various things. Objects can be
animated with basic Rotation, Location and Size keys and combinations there of.
T Key Opens the Toolbox at the side of your viewport.
Ctrl T- Used to create a Track To Constraint to make one object follow another (like a
camera with a target).
Ctrl S- Used to Save your Blender file
Alt C- Used to convert meshes, text and curves. For example, text can be converted into a
mesh for other transform options.
Shift Space Toggles between multiple screens to full screen of active view port. Can also use
Ctrl-Up Arrow to do the same thing.
Ctrl 0- If using multiple cameras, this will switch to the selected camera. (Number pad 0)
Armatures- Meshes can be controlled by bones or armatures. Create a mesh with vertices at
the joint locations, then create an armature string within it. Child/Parent the mesh to
the armature using the armature option. You can then animate in Pose Mode.
Ctrl-Tab- Puts you into Pose mode for manipulating armatures.
Import/Export- Blender accepts many different file formats through the import/export
commands. When inserting other Blender files or objects into another scene, use the
APPEND option from the file menu and select the appropriate options. Multiple
objects can be selected with Shift-Right mouse button.
Multiple Viewports- To create multiple viewports, move your cursor to the upper-right corner of
an existing viewport. When your cursor turns into a + over the tab triangle, press
LMB and drag to spit viewport area. To join areas, repeat the process.
The Basic Blender Buttons:
Editor Scene Object Material
Modifiers Particles
(window) Settings Settings Settings
Type

Render World Object Texture Physics

Constraints
Setting Settings Data Settings

x
 Chapter 1- The Blender Interface
The Blender Screen
Years ago, when I first looked at Blender and read some tutorials I thought that this
looked easy and made sense. After taking the program for a test run, I decided to
forget about it for a while because I couldnt make anything. The interface is different
than any other programs Ive experienced before. I thought Id try again and after a
few weeks however, things began to make sense and I realized the potential of the
program. If you tried Blender before the interface improvements in version 2.5, you may
enjoy the program better this time. Heres what you see when you open the program:

Lamp
Information 3D
Viewport Viewport
Outliner
Viewport

Properties
(buttons)
Camera Viewport
Cube
The &
Tool Shelf 3D Cursor
Timeline
Viewport

You are looking at a scene consisting of a cube, lamp and a camera. The cube is a
basic mesh object to give you something to look at, a lamp to illuminate the scene,
and a camera to show the scene. Older versions of Blender may open with different
scenes, but the idea stays the same. The 3D cursor in the middle of the cube is used to
locate where new items will be placed. It can be moved around on the
screen by clicking the Left Mouse Button (LMB). Along with familiar pull-down
menus like other programs, you have multiple viewports (windows) on the
screen serving different purposes. We will talk about these later and how they
can be changed. 3D Cursor

Blender works with layers much like other programs where

objects can be placed in different layers and displayed as
needed. Its a good idea to get comfortable with layers
because as your scenes get bigger, turning layers on and off help with the speed of

1-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
1- The
The Blender
Blender Interface
Interface
your work and being able to see things better. To change
things between layers, select the object with the Right Mouse
Button (RMB) and type M for move. Try it with the cube and
change layers. If you put it in a layer thats turned off, it will
disappear. To turn that layer visible, click (LMB)
on that button. To turn on multiple layers, hold down Shift and click on
the buttons. Layers containing objects will display a dot.

RoboDude Asks:
How do I select multiple objects in Blender?
Hold down the shift key while using the RMB (Right Mouse Button).

Viewport (Window) Types

Blender has a variety of different viewport, or window, types and every viewport can be
set to any type. For example, your initial screen has 5 viewports (see previous page), the
top one with the tool bars (Information viewport), the 3D viewport,
and the bottom Timeline window. On the right, you have the
Outliner and Properties viewport. The button to change viewport
types is in the upper or lower left corner of each window. There are
a lot of viewport types. The ones we are most interested in are:

File Browser- usually comes up automatically as needed

Info- menus, screen, scene and render engine options
User Preferences- can be selected from the File menu
Outliner- displays all objects in your scene and settings
Properties- once called the buttons window, where most
settings and scene options occur
Logic Editor- game and real-time animation controls
Node Editor- post-production effects for a scene
Video Sequence Editor- compile final movies with images,
effects and sounds
UV/Image Editor- setting textures for games and movies
Graph Editor- replaces IPO window- displays animation data
Timeline- animation timeline with display and record controls
3D View- your basic 3D scene window where you work

Ready-Made Screens
Blender has several ready-made screens for you to choose
from that make optimal use of these windows. They can be
accessed from the top pull-down menu area. Besides
Default, you can choose depending on what you're
doing.

1-2
 Chapter 1- The Blender Interface
The User Preferences Window
The User Preferences Window can be called up by selecting it
in the File pull-down menu. This is where you can customize
Blender to react to your particular needs. If you would like
these setting to be in place every time you open Blender, you
can save them by clicking the Save As Default button or by
pressing Ctrl U.

RoboDude Says:
Be careful to only use this setting at the beginning of a drawing
session and on your own personal machine (not school computers,
unless the instructor approves). If a drawing is open at the time,
that drawing will automatically open every time you use Blender. It
will become the default scene and replace the cube, lamp and
camera basic setup!

Blender works well using

the default settings, but
there are several things
you may want to
change for your own use
to stream line your work
flow or react better for
your computer. By
looking at the tabs across
the top of the window,
you can select options in
several areas. Here are a
few you might want to
look at:

Editing Tab- Instead of new objects aligning to the World, you may want to try View.
The Global Undo steps are defaulted for 32. If this isn't enough, add more.
Input Tab- The Emulate Number Pad option is great for laptops without number pads.
Add-Ons Tab- There are some great add-ons included. A good one is 3D View:
Dynamic Context Menu. Provides an add object menu with the space bar.
Themes Tab- This is where you can change the appearance of everything!
File Tab- If you save sounds, textures, etc. in specific folders, set the paths to save time.
System Tab- If you need to make adjustments to sound and memory or game setting,
they can be done here.

Some of these settings will be examined more in the Setting Up Your Interface task.

1-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
1- The
The Blender
Blender Interface
Interface
Open, Saving and Appending Files
Blender utilizes commands similar to other programs when it
comes to saving and opening your work with a few
exceptions. Blender can use the Open command to open
Blender (.blend) files and the Append command to bring in
elements from other Blender files into another Blender file.
Blender also has extensive Import and Export options in the file
menu that work well with VRML (.wrl),.DXF, and .STL files. These
are generic file interchange extensions that most programs
can work with, as well as 3D printers.

RoboDude Says:
Be careful to save your work often! Like most
programs, Blender will give you a basic warning to
save your work when exiting the program, but
that is all- it will just close, losing any work you may
not have saved.

The Save Command:

When you first start working with Blender, it seems almost impossible to figure out how to
save your work. The file interface almost resembles old MS-DOS. Also, every time you
save over an existing file, your previous save becomes a back-up file and is saved with
a new extension (.blend1). This always gives you a back-up if a problem occurs. Heres
what you see when you hit the save command:
Folder Navigation and
Viewing View Filters Save Button

Available Drives Sub Folders Path where work Where you name
and Bookmarks and Files will be saved your file
1-4
 Chapter 1- The Blender Interface
The Append Command:
When you need to insert elements from one Blender (.blend) file into another one, you
need to use the Append command from the file pull-down menu. While in Append, you
need to navigate to the Blender file you wish to insert from, then select what you want
to append into the open file. You can append anything from cameras, lights meshes,
materials, textures, scenes and objects. For most purposes, use the Object option. By
appending objects, any materials, textures and animations that are linked to that
object will automatically come in with it. Left Mouse Button (LMB) clicking on objects will
select\deselect them (hold down Shift to select multiple objects). Typing A will
select them all. After you select all objects to append, click the Append from Library
button in the upper right corner of the screen.

The Link option allows you to link to another Blender file rather than inserting it into the
open file and also found in the File menu. This option allows for changes to the linked file
that will be automatically updated when the other file is opened.

Packing Data

If you plan to open this file on other computers, you

will need to select the Automatically Pack into
.blend file option in the File menu under External
Data. Textures and sounds are not automatically
included in your Blender file in order to keep the file
size down. Every time your file opens, it looks for the
textures and sounds and places them into your
model. If it cant find the files, you wont have any
textures and sounds. If you pack data, those files are
included with the .blend file so they can be opened
anywhere, however, your file size may explode. You
can also unpack data to bring the file size back
down.

1-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
1- The
The Blender
Blender Interface
Interface
Importing Objects (from other file formats)
One of Blenders strong points is the programs ability to accept several generic types
of 3D files from other programs. The most popular used are:

.STL files- STL files have grown in popularity in recent years, being
fueled by the 3D printer movement. Just about every 3D
printing slicing program will accept .stl files. A unit on
processing 3D printer files appears toward the end of this
book.

.DXF files- A very popular file format for exporting and sharing.
AutoCAD and SoftPlan architectural software
traditionally exports with .dxf formats.

VRML (.wrl) files- Once a popular 3D file type, .wrl files seem to be losing
ground to .stl files.

To save a file as one of these types from another program, you will need to find an
export command or a save as option. This will vary depending on the program you
are using. Refer to that programs help files. To import a STL, VRML or DXF file into a
Blender scene, open a new drawing or one you wish to insert the object(s) into. You will
simply need to use the Import command in the File pull-down menu. Now you need to
find the object(s) you just inserted. Depending on how that object was drawn, it may
need to be re-sized or rotated.
With every new release of Blender, the
import/export format options list grows. You
should be able to find a format in the list that will
work with your other programs.

If a file format isn't available, check in the Add-

Ons section in the User Preferences menu
under File. There may be an add-on script
written for your file type, but not turned on.

1-6
 Setting Up Your Interface
Scenario:
You work for an advertising firm where you work with specific files and use certain tools
all the time. It would be nice to be able to set Blender so it opens with these setting
turned on by default every time.

Customizing You Screen Settings:

In order to get some practice adjusting interface settings, set up your Blender program
to some of these commonly used, but not initially enabled features in the User
Preferences settings:

Input Tab:
-Check Emulate 3-Button Mouse if you do not have a mouse with a wheel. The
Alt-Left button will act like a mouse wheel.
- Check Emulate Numpad if you are using a keyboard without a number pad.
This will make the buttons 1-9,0 act like the number pad buttons, useful in the
next chapter.
Add-Ons tab (enable the following):
- 3D View: Dynamic Context Menu (easily add object by using the spacebar).
- All of the Add Curve and Add Mesh options.
- Any additional Import-Export commands you need or instructor recommends.
- Look through the list for any other add-ons of importance to you.
Themes tab:
- Experiment with the preset themes to see if any interest you.
- There is a Reset to Default Theme to go back to the basic theme.
File tab:
- If you have textures, sounds, or fonts saved in a specific location and would like
Blender to go there directly every time you want to add one of these resources,
set these paths now by clicking on the file folder picture by each line.
- If using a standard Windows computer, set the path to the following for fonts:

If you are using a personal computer or your instructor tells you to do so, press the Save
User Settings button on the lower-left corner of the User Preferences window. Every
time you now launch Blender, these setting should now be the defaults.

**Call the instructor when finished**

1-7
Chapter
Chapter 1- The Blender Interface
1 Reflection
Chapter 1 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Program Interfaces and User Reactions

A computer program's interface can make or break the program's

success. If the interface is difficult to navigate, it can frustrate users and
drive them to find an alternate program. While other 3D modeling and
animation programs may use catchy graphic icons and ribbon menus for operations,
Blender tends to stick to basic text buttons and menus.

1. In terms of learning a new program, which type of layout do you feel may be easier
to use? Explain your answer.

2. In terms of being quick and easy to use for the seasoned professional, which type of
layout do you feel may be easier to use? Explain your answer.

3. Examine at least one other 3D animation program online (Maya, Lightwave, 3D

Studio, etc.). By looking at website screenshots and descriptions, how does Blender
compare with their interface? Name at least 3 things that appear similar and 3 things
that appear different.

4. Compare Blender's features to the same program you selected in #3 by looking at

feature lists on each program's website. How do they compare in features and price?
Explain your answer.

1-8
 Chapter 2- Working with Viewports
Moving Around in 3D Space
In a 3D program, not only do you have to worry about where you are in 2 dimensions
(height and width), but you also need to consider depth (how close or far away).
Before you can work in 3D space, you should have some skills in 2D drawing and layout.
Moving around in the 3D window is controlled by the mouse and the keyboard number
pad (NOT the numbers across the top of the keyboard- these change layers). Think of a
standard 3-view orthographic drawing- top, front and right side views. These views
match up with the number pad 7,1 and 3 keys (look at their arrangement on the
keyboard- just like the views). Put your cursor in the 3D window and try typing those
numbers. Typing 0 will put you into camera view (what the camera sees).

By default, the camera is

represented by a single line,
representing the edge of what is
rendered and shaded to the
outside. You also have the option
of turning on an additional
dashed line box to represent a
Title Safe box (helpful in
planning). Changing these
settings will be discussed in a
later chapter. You will also notice
a small note in the upper-left
corner of the viewport telling you
the view name and if it
orthographic or perspective.

The number pad 5 key will always

toggle you between perspective
and orthographic views. The number pad arrow keys (2,4,6,8) will rotate you around in
3D space. The + and - keys on the number pad will zoom in and out. The number
pad . (period) key will center your view up on the selected object on your screen.
Ctrl and 7,1, or 3 will give the opposite view.

The mouse serves a number of functions. The Left Mouse Button (LMB) will move the 3D
cursor around on the screen and for dragging windows for selecting objects. Wherever
the 3D cursor is located is where the next item you create will be placed. The 3D cursor
serves other purposes that we will discuss later. The Right Mouse Button (RMB) is used to
select object or vertices (in edit mode). The mouse wheel serves 2 purposes. Scrolling
the wheel zooms in and out (like the + and - keys). Holding down the mouse wheel will
let you rotate the view. Holding down Shift and Mouse Wheel will let you pan around on
the screen.
RoboDude Says:
Practice using these controls before moving on to other lessons. Without
getting a grasp on working in 3D space, you will have a difficult time creating
and modifying objects.

2-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
2- The Blender
Working withInterface
Viewports
Window and Button Control
So now you know how to
save your Blender file and
move around in 3D space.
We're still not really able to
create anything yet, but
soon. You have a default
screen with several
viewports. You may have
noticed that along with the
Tool Shelf on the left side,
you can also have a
Transform panel on the right
of your viewport. These are
definitely useful panels as
you will soon see, but they
take up a lot of space. You
can minimize them by
dragging on the edge of them with the LMB while your cursor
looks like a left/right arrow. So how do you bring them back
out when you need them? With your cursor in the 3D window,
you could type T for the Tool Shelf or N for the Numeric
Transform panel. This will open the panels
up again (pressing either button a 2 nd time
will close the panel up). You can also click on the small + symbols
at the sides of the viewport to open them.

The 3D View Window Header:

A lot of the key commands we will talk about in the book can be controlled in the
Window Header. Some of the common operations found there are:

Drawing Rendering
Modes
Display Pivot Manipulator Layers Proportional Snapping
Shading Points Widgets Editing
Scrolling in the Properties Panel:

You may notice that many of the buttons and panels are off
the screen. Accessing those buttons can be done by holding
down your mouse wheel (like it's a button)and using it to pan
left-to-right. The same can be done to access the panels below the
buttons. You can also use the + and - keys on the number pad to
zoom in and out on the panels.

Panels can also be minimized and maximized to take up less space by

clicking on the small triangles found on each.

2-2
 Chapter 2- Working with Viewports
Creating Viewports (also called windows)
Most times, you need more than one 3D window to work with since youre trying to
locate objects in three dimensions. Most rendering and animations programs allow for
multiple viewports along with graphical views of various data. Blender allows the same.
Remember that Blender starts with 5 viewports, but only one 3D View window (discussed
on pages 1-1 and 1-2). You can change the size of any of these windows by using the
LMB and dragging on the line between the viewports. In order to split a viewport, move
your cursor over the small triangle in the upper right corner of the 3D
View Window. When the cursor turns into a +, drag with your LMB
to split your screen into 2 viewports. Joining viewports together works
the same way. Click on the triangle and drag over the viewport you
wish to remove. Theres no limit to the number of times you can split your windows. I like
to traditionally work with 2 views like the example shown below. I use the left view to flip
between my principle views (top, front, side) and the right view for camera view and
animation tracks (which well discuss later). In the view shown below, I've minimized the
Tool Shelf and Transform Panel to maximize screen space.

Windows can also be split along

a vertical line. Some 3D
programs traditionally give you 4
viewports that are set-up as
front, top, right side, and
perspective or camera views.
Basically, it is up to what you
want to work with.

2-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
2- The Blender
Working withInterface
Viewports
Typical Views and Buttons:

Here are some typical views used to model in 3D and the buttons on the number pad to
go along with them. In order to make them work, you need to have the Num Lock
button pressed. Get use to working with the principle views (top, front, side) in
orthographic mode when locating the 3D cursor. You will usually need to check the
location of the cursor in at least 2 views when placing objects. New to Blender 2.6 is that
the name of the view is displayed in the upper left corner of the viewport.

Top View
(7 key)

Free-Rotation
Orthographic View

Front View
(1 key)

Side View
(3 key)

Perspective
View 5 key toggles
between ortho and
perspective views-
Ortho is easier!
Camera View
(0 key)
Orthographic
View
RoboDude Asks:
How do I view Bottom, Back or Left
Views?
Hold down the Ctrl key while you hit
the 1,3 or 7 keys on the number pad.

2-4
 Multiple Viewport Configuration
In order to get some experience with these commands, set up a screen with four
viewports using a top, front, side and camera or perspective views as displayed below:

Be prepared to be able to demonstrate the following techniques to the instructor when

asked:

Panning around on the screen, scrolling the buttons/panels

Zooming
Changing window types
Centering the view on a certain object
Switching views (top, front, side, camera,
free-rotate)
Opening and closing the Tool Shelf and
Transform Panel
Closing (collapsing) a viewport

** Call the instructor when finished**

2-5
Chapter
Chapter 1- The Blender Interface
2 Reflection
Chapter 2 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Working in a 3D World
While we live in a three-dimensional world, it is an entirely different thing
to work in a computer generated three-dimensional world. 3D work
spaces can be difficult for many students to grasp. Practice is the key.

1. Blender uses the number pad and mouse to control your 3D views and location. If you
were asked to re-design the commands for moving in 3D space, would you use the
same configuration, or develop something different? Explain your answer.

2. How does working in 3D space relate to math? Where have you ever used the
concepts of X,Y, and Z in a math course? Explain your answer.

3. Research GPS on the internet. How does GPS work so that it can determine where you
are on a map?

2-6
`
Chapter 3- Creating & Editing Objects
Working with Basic Meshes
Now that you can move around in Blender, lets start doing some basic building and
shaping. In this chapter we will talk about creating basic shapes and using modifiers to
form them. Blender has a lot of different object types. Right now we will only discuss
Meshes.

Start a new drawing in Blender and save it in your My Documents directory, or other
specified drive. Call it Sculpture. Since there a variety of operating system and saving
structures, you may need to set up folders as needed.
RoboDude Asks:
Why do I keep losing my work?
Since Blender's file interface differs from most other programs, it can be easy to
lose track of where you are saving files and not saving often enough.
Remember to always save your work often!

Placing Objects On Your Screen:

The 3D Cursor (bulls-eye) location is used to place new objects. Use the left mouse
button to move the cursor in 3D space When you have it in a
good location, press Shift-A to bring up the
insert menu (or space bar if you enabled the
dynamic space bar add-on). Select Add,
then Mesh and select UV Sphere (my mesh
menu may display more items than your
menu due to selecting different add-ons in
the preferences menu). You will then be
asked how many segments and rings you
want in the bottom of the Tool Shelf (open
this if closed with the T key). You can
change these by dragging the mouse in the
block or by clicking in the box to type. Your
sphere will change to reflect your settings.
You can also adjust some other settings there.

When you place an object in Blender, it comes into the scene in Object
Mode. There are basically 2 states in Blender- Edit Mode and Object
Mode. Edit mode is intended for modifying the shape of the object by selecting vertices
on the object. Object mode affects the object as a whole. The Tab
button toggles you between the two. You can also see
and change your mode at the bottom of the viewport.
After inserting an object into your scene, always make
sure you're in Object Mode.
Otherwise, the next object
you create will be joined to
that mesh!

3-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
3- The Blender
Creating Interface
& Editing Objects
As mentioned on the previous page, another way to switch
between Edit and Object mode besides using the Tab key is to
use the Mode menu at the bottom of the 3D screen. Notice that
there are a few more modes than just Edit and Object. Some of
these will be discussed in later chapters.

Precise 3D Cursor Placement:

To precisely place the 3D cursor, use the
Shift-S keys for options to move the
cursor to objects, grid, and vice-versa.

Mesh Types
When pressing the space bar and choosing to add a mesh, you will notice several mesh
types (often called primitives) available. More can be added through Add-Ons in the
User Preferences menu. They are:

Plane- A simple two-dimensional shape. Can be sub divided and used

with proportional vertex editing to make nice hilly terrain or shaped.
Cube- Basic 3D shape. Nice object to start with to shape into rectangles
and other shapes.
Circle- Wont display as a 3D object unless filled, but can be extruded and
shaped.
UV Sphere- A sphere generated with rings and segments, like the latitude and
longitude of the earth.
Icosphere- A sphere generated with triangular shapes. Like Epcot Center.

Cylinder- Like a can, with ends closed, but if you leave the ends off, it is a
tube.
Cone- Basic closed cone shape.

Grid- Can be used and extruded like the plane.

Monkey- A fun shape that someone decided to include in the mesh

list.
Empty Mesh- A mesh without any visible vertices, edges or faces.

Torus- A donut shape.

RoboDude Asks:
How do I set the quality of a mesh?
Remember that after selecting a mesh type, you will see the settings for that mesh
at the bottom of the Tool Shelf. Also, don't forget to be in Object Mode when
making a new mesh- otherwise, your new mesh will be joined to another mesh.

3-2
`
Chapter 3- Creating & Editing Objects
Using Main Modifiers to Manipulate Meshes
Before we look at actually changing the shape of the meshes and turning them into
other shapes, we should become comfortable with creating, moving, rotating and
scaling basic meshes. The three main modifying commands used in Blender are:

G key- move or grab and object

S key- sizing or scaling an object
R key- rotating an object

If you would like to do any of these operations through an exact

number (i.e. rotate 90 degrees on the X axis or size something to a
specific number), type the N key to bring up the Transform bar on
the right side of your screen (or click the small + at the top right
corner). You can also lock numbers.
RoboDude Says: If you would like to move something along a
straight axis line (X,Y,Z), enter the Move command and drag the
object the direction you wish to go. Press the mouse wheel
(dont scroll, press it like a button). The object will lock on a
straight line. In the Move command, you can also type X,Y, or Z.
In the rotate command, type a number after typing R.

You may be wondering- What are these units of measurement? By default, you are
measuring in Blender Units. The Dimensions block is in millimeters by default. We will
look at changing this to an actual metric or imperial system later.

Using the Transform Widgets:

Rather than typing R,S or G to manipulate an object, you can turn on the widget
feature and simply grab the axis you wish to change. You can also change the motions
to reflect Global (normal X,Y,Z planes), Normal or Local (X,Y,Z planes in relation to the
object) movement.
Grab directional lines with LMB to manipulate

Widgets On/Off Move, Rotate, or Global/Local

Scale Settings

3-3
Chapter
Create a1-Sculpture
The Blender Interface
Scenario:
You have been employed to create a digital mock up of a modern art sculpture that
uses only basic primitive geometric shapes.

Create a sculpture using at least 1 of every type of mesh found in the Add-Mesh menu
(do not use grid or circle). Remember to make sure you are in Object Mode before
creating a new mesh. Use a plane for the ground and scale it large. Divide your 3D
window into two so you can have one working view and one camera view. Use the
RMB to select objects on the screen. Experiment with sizing and rotating objects. New
commands:
Size (S key)- to change the size/scale of the object.
Rotate (R key)- to rotate the object.
Move (G key)- to change the location of objects.
Duplicate (Shift-D)- to make a copy of something on the screen.
Shaded (Z key)- used to toggle the window from wireframe to solid view.
Tool Shelf (T key)- shows editing commands and setting mesh detail.
Transform (N key)- show the transform panel for exact placement of mesh.

Remember to make use of the number keys 1,3 and 7 to change your principle views!
Also play with the camera location and angle to get a nice view!
Save your work often!

** You do not have to make a monkey-this is just an example of using the meshes! **

** Call the instructor when finished**

3-4
`
Chapter 3- Creating & Editing Objects
Edit Mode- Mesh Editing Object Mode
After you have created a mesh, you can go into Edit mode (Tab key or
Mode option in window) and change its shape. In edit mode, you can
work with the shapes individual vertices (mesh intersections) to create the
shape you want. You know youre in edit mode when you see pink or
yellow dots on the selected object. Pink dots are unselected vertices while
yellow dots are selected vertices. Edit Mode

RoboDude Asks: How Do I UNDO a mistake?

Pressing CTRL-Z will take you back 1 step at a time (edit or
object modes). CRTL-SHIFT-Z will redo what you undid.

Selecting Vertices:
While in edit mode, to select a single vertex, RMB click on the vertex. To select multiple
vertices, hold down the Shift key while RMB clicking on them. To drag a window around
vertices, type B key and drag a window to select. Typing the C key will bring up a
circular selection tool that can be sized by pressing the + or - keys on the number
pad. Scrolling the center mouse wheel will do the same as + and - keys. To select
vertices in circle select mode, hold down the LMB. To de-select vertices, hold down the
mouse wheel. Pressing Esc will get you out of the circular selection tool. In order to
select all vertices or deselect currently selected ones, hit the A key (for all) once or
twice.

Viewing (Shading) Options:

In order to be able to see your objects better in object and edit
modes, you can change the way your scene is displayed. The
main options are Solid and Wireframe and changed
with the Z key, but other views are available. All
are available in the bottom of the 3D window by the
drawing modes. Solid Wireframe

Edit Mode Selection Options:

By default, you are selecting vertices, but you can also select edges and faces. You
can find these options at the bottom of the 3D window while in edit mode.

In Solid view, this button will hide

back faces, edges and verticies.
(Occlude background geometry)
Vertex Select Edge Select Face Select

After selecting the vertices, you can use the same basic modifiers we talked about in
the previous exercise (G-grab or move, S-scale, R-rotate).

3-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
3- The Blender
Creating Interface
& Editing Objects
Using the Shading Smooth-Flat Options and Auto Smooth: Flat Smooth
As you add objects and view them in Flat
shading, you will notice that circular objects
are not being displayed smooth. In the Tool
Shelf, you will see two buttons under Shading labeled Smooth and
Flat. These 2 buttons not only effect the way things look on the screen, but how they will
be rendered in a final image. Be aware that the appearance of objects on the screen
are not displayed at the same quality as a final rendered image. Auto Smooth (found in
the Object Data buttons) is used to smooth objects when faces meet
at a certain degree or less while larger
angles are kept sharp. This is a great
feature when Smooth does not work
properly alone. To use Auto Smooth, hit
the Auto Smooth button. Adjust the
degree angles as needed. To see a
rendered picture of what the camera
views, press F12. Smooth and Auto-Smooth are great for
flat objects as well and help rendering.
Smooth Only Auto Smooth

Extruding Shapes:

Shapes can be lengthened by selecting a group of vertices, then by pressing the E

key (or by selecting it in the Tool Shelf). You will make a duplicate of those vertices. They
can then be G (moved), S (scaled), and R (rotated). When extruding a face, it
will extrude in a locked direction, perpendicular to the face. When extruding
connected vertices only, the extrusion will be free-moving. If you use the Extrude
Individual command in the Tool Shelf, it will extrude only the vertices and no faces (it
won't be visible in 3D). Feel free to experiment with them. Below are example of a cube,
extruded from the right side (only right 4 vertices were selected) several times using
scale and rotate and a pawn extruded from a circle.

Basic Cube

3-6
`
Chapter 3- Creating & Editing Objects
The Tool Shelf
The Tool Shelf is one of the biggest changes in recent years and recently
improved with tabs. In edit mode, you can access several edit commands with
the W key (Specials Menu), but most of these options are now in the Tool Shelf
as well. The Tool Shelf has different commands for edit and object modes. Here
is what you can find in the Tool Shelf and some descriptions of what we need:
Tool Shelf- Object Mode:
Transform:
Rather than hitting G,R, or
S, you can click these
Relationships Tab:
buttons.
Use for linking objects and
Duplicate/Join: data together.
Duplicate or Join selected
Objects.
Origin:
Used to re-center your
object's geometry and
center point. (see note
below) Animation Tab:
Create keyframes and
set paths.

Create Tab:
Create meshes, curves,
lamps, and other
objects.
Physics Tab:
Use for Blender's
More About the Object's physics engine and
Origin: reactions.
The object's origin is the
small dot for an object. By
default, it is in the middle of
the object, but can get
moved if you move an
object in edit mode (moving
verticies only and not the
entire object). To fix this, or
to move it to a usable Grease Pencil:
location (for example, a Used to make
door needs it's origin on the mark-up notes on
edge to act like a hinge), your screen.
use the origin option in the
tool shelf to move the
object-to-center, the center-
to-object, or center-to-
cursor location. Remember
that the cursor can be
accurately placed using the
Shift-S command.

3-7
Chapter
Chapter 1-
3- The Blender
Creating Interface
& Editing Objects
Tool Shelf- Edit Mode:

Transform: Shading Tab:

Same as Object Mode, but for Smooth/Flat- limits
selected vertices only. smoothing for selected
features.
Normals- A face has 2
sides and can look odd if
Deform: they do not all face the
Slide Edge/Vertex- moves same direction Flips face
selected edges and vertices calculations to all face
along surface. the same way. Helpful
Smooth Vertex- Smooths out with smoothing.
selected vertices UV Mapping- special
Randomize- Roughs up a texture technique where
selection you can wrap an image
onto a mesh. Goof for
Add: game design.
Extrude- same as hitting E with
vertices selected.
Subdivide- cuts selected
verticies and provides more
detail.
Loop Cut/Slide- controlled Options Tab:
dividing. Set some basic actions
Duplicate- Make copies. like how edges are
Spin/Screw- revolved copying. selected and how close
Knife- slices edges. vertices need to be to be
considered doubles.

Remove:
Deletion options, merging of
vertices, and removal of double
verticies.

Create Tab: Grease Pencil Tab:

Same as Object mode, Same as object mode.
except only lets you add Used to sketch on your
similar type items. model.

3-8
`
Chapter 3- Creating & Editing Objects
Proportional Editing
Proportional Editing is used to create a flow in the shape
when editing vertices. To turn proportional editing on, press
the O key while in edit mode or by selecting the small
circle button on the toolbar (enable). Proportional Editing
now also works in Object Mode! By
selecting the prop. editing
command in object mode, objects
around the selected object will
move proportionally with it. You have several options for
effecting vertices in proportional editing. We usually use Sharp or
Smooth falloff, but feel free free to experiment with the other
options. The examples below are with one vertex selected.

Proportional Editing Smooth Falloff Sharp Falloff Small Area Large Area
Off

RoboDude Asks: How do I control the number of verticies affected?

By pressing the + and - keys on the number pad or by scrolling the center
mouse wheel. You will see a circle on the screen that changes size.

Knife/Cut Tools:
The Knife Tool allows you to split edges differently than the subdivide
command. To use the knife tool, select the vertices you wish to cut, hold
the K key while dragging a line across the surface you wish to split. You
can also select the Loop Cut and Slide option in the Tool Shelf to cut
around an object.

Knife Project:
The Knife Project tool allows you to project the shape of one mesh
onto another one. This is a great feature when you need a group of
vertices that match a specific shape, like text or a circle, that can
be extruded or have a different material applied. Here is an
example of knife projecting a circle onto a cube. In order to use
knife project, select the projected object first (the filled circle in this
case), then the object to project onto (the cube) while holding
shift. The object will project
according to the view you are in, so select the
proper view for projecting. Enter Edit Mode (Tab
key), and find the Knife Project option in the
Tool Shelf under Tools. The mesh will project
onto the cube.

3-9
Chapter
Chapter 1-
3- The Blender
Creating Interface
& Editing Objects
Eliminating Double Vertices and Faces:
One of the biggest problems you can encounter while learning to extrude and shape
objects in any 3D program is creating extra vertices and faces as you work. While the
problem may not be apparent as you work, problems will occur during rendering or
while performing other editing features such as Boolean operations. With experience,
you will encounter this problem less frequently.

A very common problem seen in many 3d models, even

professionally, is shown to the right called Z-Fighting. Z-
Fighting occurs when 2 faces occupy the same space
and the program has trouble deciding which one to
render. The result is typically a darker area on the model.

After creating your model, or when you suspect that

you have double vertices, the easiest way to remove
them is to enter Edit Mode and use the A key to
select all vertices (remember that you may need to
press A twice to deselect and re-select all). In the
Tools tab of the Tool Shelf, find the Remove
Doubles button. When you press the button, Blender
will tell you if and how
many double vertices were found in the top bar.

Removing double faces can be a little more difficult.

Many times, removing the double vertices will also take
care of the double face problem, but not always.
Sometime, the double faces will display differently in the
view port, making it easier to recognize them. In Edit
Mode, switch to selection by Faces, select a face you
suspect to be double and hit Delete -Only Faces

Using Subdivide and Proportional Editing to Create Ground Contour:

You can use proportional editing to create flowing landscape easily.
The first thing you need to do is create a plane in the top view ( 7 key).
While in edit mode, make sure all vertices are selected (vertices are
yellow). You can use the A key to select them all. In the Tool Shelf,
select Subdivide. Do this a few times. Select a single vertex
somewhere near center. Next, switch to a front view (1 key) and enter
Proportional Editing. Select Smooth Falloff. Type G to grab (move) the vertex. Use the
+ - keys on number pad or scroll mouse wheel to change the size of the selection.
Select other vertices and falloffs for more hills and
shapes. To see your final work in a smooth display, exit
edit mode (Tab key) and ,with the object selected,
Select Smooth from the Tool Shelf. This will smooth the
mesh in display and final output. Finally, hit the Z
key to shade your view.

3-10
`
Modeling a Landscape and Lighthouse

Scenario:
A friend creates YouTube videos for his channel and wants a nice 3D animated
lighthouse scene to use as a video production logo. Your job is to create that logo.

This is the basic scene, but as you work through the chapters, you will be encouraged to
add more elements and details to your lighthouse and landscape to make it your own.
We will eventually add rain to our stormy night at sea scene and animate the water,
light and camera.

The first thing we need to do is create a new Blender scene and save it as Landscape
Scene. Again, we will be using this file for the next several chapters, so keep it safe and
save often! Change the upper-right viewport from the Outliner window type to a 3D
View window type as shown on the next page. We will use the left viewport for working
in and the right top one for camera and 3D views. Adjust the viewport size similar to
shown.

While in the top orthographic view (number pad 7 and 5- note the label in the top, left
corner) erase the initial cube from the scene, then add a plane from the mesh menu
(Shift A- add- mesh- plane). For now, you may want to turn off the 3D widgets.

3-11
Chapter
Modeling1-aThe Blender Interface
Landscape and Lighthouse
Change the
upper-right
viewport from
Outliner to 3D
View so your
scene looks like
this.

Remember that you can close and open the Tool Shelf and Transform panels at any
time. To re-open them, click on the small + or type T for Tool Shelf and N for
Transform Panel. Often, you will be unable to see all of the buttons and panels in the
Transform and Tool Shelf bars. Scroll your mouse wheel in the panels to view everything.

The plane you created on the previous page will be used for our
ground. Our next step is to scale it up a bit. To do this precisely, we
will use the Transform Panel. With the plane selected and in Object
Mode, press N to bring up the Transform Panel. Change the
Scale X,Y, and Z to 10.000. Close the Transform Panel. You may
need to zoom out to see the entire plane.

Next, go into Edit Mode (tab) and make sure all

vertices are selected (A key). In the Tool Shelf, click
Subdivide 6 times. Your plane should be well
subdivided.

Deselect all vertices using A and

press C for the circular selection tool. Selected
While holding down the LMB, select
half the vertices as shown. Keep the
edge random similar to what is shown
so it looks like a rough shoreline. If you
select too many vertices, remember
that by holding down the mouse
wheel, you can deselect vertices. De-
Selected

3-12
`
Modeling a Landscape and Lighthouse
Now switch to the front view (number pad 1). Your plane will now just look like a line.
Type G to grab and move the selected vertices. Move them up about 2 Blender grid
blocks. You may want to
type Z to keep the move
locked to the vertical axis.
Use your right side viewport
to spin around and get a
nice look at the landscape.

Now its time to make some fine adjustments to the

mesh to make the cliff edge a bit more random. Turn on
the proportional editing button (small bulls eye button)
and experiment with the types of falloff. Select single
vertex, G to grab and scroll the mouse wheel to
change the affected areas while moving. While in the
move command, type Z to lock to z-axis.

Randomly pull the edges of the cliff up and

down to different levels. You may even
want to do some of this with proportional
editing off. Try selecting a few vertices back
on the high flat land and create some hills.
Leave a flat area close to the cliff to place
the lighthouse later.

The scenes looking better, but a bit angular. Exit

edit mode (tab) and find the Smooth button in
the Tool Shelf. Press it and you should see a much
better looking landscape (you must be in object
mode to see the smoothing).

Now its time to set up the camera. Start by adding an Empty

object in the top view (7 number pad key). An Empty is basically
used for targeting purposes and does not render as a visible
object. Press Shift A- Add- Empty- Plain Axes. Scale it up a bit.

Now, RMB click on the camera to select it. We will add a Tracking constraint to the
camera to always point toward the Empty. With the camera selected first, hold down
the Shift key and RMB click on the Empty. Both objects will be highlighted. Press Ctrl-T
and add a TrackTo Constraint. A dashed line indicates the link. With the camera
selected only, move it around- it always points to the Empty. If the link
appears to work backwards, it means you had the Empty selected first.
Use the UNDO command to back up and try again.

3-13
Chapter
Modeling1-aThe Blender Interface
Landscape and Lighthouse
Its time to place the Camera and Empty at good rendering locations. You will need to
use the move command (G key) and place the Empty and Camera using your
principle views of Top (#7), Front (#1), and Side (#3). Try to get the camera low so it
looks as though you are viewing the shore line from a boat. Place the Empty on the cliff
line. Use the picture below to frame up your view. You do not want to see any edges on
your rendering. Use the F12 key to render out a picture.

Camera View
0 on the number
pad

Use Shift D to
duplicate the light if
your scene seems
dark when rendered

Here is the final render. Were still missing water, textures and a few other things, but its
a good start. Feel free to develop and refine the landscape contour any way you wish.
The more time you spend with it, the quicker you will become comfortable with the
program and the more realistic it will become.

Save the scene and start a new

Blender file (I hope youve been
saving every few minutes
anyways). We are finished with
the landscape for now and will
now begin developing the
lighthouse as a separate scene
that well add to the landscape
at a later time. Save this new
Blender file as Lighthouse.

3-14
`
Modeling a Landscape and Lighthouse
Now its time to start shaping a lighthouse using the
Extrude and Scale commands. Begin by deleting the
default cube and add a Circle (Shift A- Add- Mesh-
Circle) in the Top Ortho View (#7, 5). Use the default
setting of 32 vertices, radius of 1, and Fill Type- Triangle
Fan. (found at bottom of the Tool Shelf). These setting
will be fine for what we are making. Depending on
what you are making and what it will be used for, you
may require more or less vertices.

You will now need to switch to the Front View (#1) so the circle
appears as a line. Enter Edit Mode and make sure all vertices are
selected (yellow) and press E to Extrude. If you forgot to add the
Fill when making the circle, you will need to press the Z key as
you extrude to lock on the Z axis. If you filled the circle, it will
extrude on the Z axis automatically. Extrude the lighthouse about
3 Blender grid blocks high and LMB click to place them. Hit S to
Scale them in slightly. This is your lighthouse- feel free to adjust sizes
as desired. Remember to stay in the front view throughout this
process! Rotated views can cause a distorted lighthouse.

It is now time to make the small walkway around the top. Press E
to extrude again and right mouse button (RMB) click. This will place
the new extruded vertices right on top of the old ones. Then S to
scale. Pull your mouse away from the lighthouse and scale the
walkway outward as desired. LMB click when you have a good size.
Remember, you can always UNDO (Ctrl-Z) if it doesnt seem right.
Extrude again to give the walkway some height. You will then
Extrude, RMB and Scale again to reduce the size back inward.

Continue extruding and shaping to get the light area and the roof.
The point of the roof will actually have 32 vertices which you could
scale very small so that it appears to be a
single point, but we will use a Tool Shelf
command to correct this. Select the Merge
option and At Center. You
will see that 31 vertices are
being removed, leaving
only one at the center.

3-15
Chapter
Modeling1-aThe Blender Interface
Landscape and Lighthouse
Exit Edit Mode for the lighthouse then select and move your Camera to a
location that displays the lighthouse well and press F12 to render an
image. The lighthouse looks good, but angular. It will take more than
Smooth Shading to make it look good. Some edges actually need to stay
sharp. This is where Auto Smooth becomes important.

Select the lighthouse again. In the Tool

Shelf, select the Smooth button under
shading. Ignore how the lighthouse look on
the screen. Render a picture with F12 to
see the results. Some things are smooth that
should remain sharp (and some other
strange edge effects). Go to the
Object Data buttons and find the
Auto Smooth button. You will
notice a degree angle below the
Auto Smooth button. Leaving it a
the default of 30 degrees should
work well, but feel free to experiment with other setting. Basically,
this setting determines which faces are smoothed and which ones are kept sharp.

Finally, press F12 to render a picture

and check your results. If you havent
saved your file, do so now and
remember to save often. We are
finished with our lighthouse for now. If
you have the time, feel free to modify
the lighthouse, change the style, add
more features, etc. A good possible
addition could be to use Torus and
cylinder meshes to create a railing
around the walkway. Remember, the
Torus mesh features can be adjusted in
the bottom half of the Tool Shelf.

** Call the instructor when finished**

3-16
`
Chapter 3- Creating & Editing Objects
Joining/Separating Meshes and Boolean Operations
Now that you have some experience with basic editing, here are few more options:

Joining Meshes:

To join 2 or more meshes together, Hold down

the Shift key to select them, then press Ctrl
and J to join them. They will retain any
materials you have placed on them, but will
be one object. Also available in the Tool
Shelf.

Separating Meshes:

In order to break up a mesh, you need to be in edit mode (Tab Key)

and select the vertices you wish to separate from the rest of the
mesh. With vertices selected, type the P key (I like to think of it as
partition) and select your option. You also an option to separate all
loose parts.

Deleting Vertices, Edges, and Faces:

If you want to make a hole in a mesh, select the vertices, edges, or

faces you wish to remove, then hit the Delete key. Select the
option of what you wish to delete.

Adding Faces:

Sometimes, you need to fill in holes in a mesh by creating your

own faces. To do this, go into edit mode and select the
vertices you wish to face together (you are limited to 4
vertices in a group). With vertices selected, hit the F key. A
face will be formed. Here is an example of 2 cubes joined
together with a space that needs filled between them. In
edit mode, select the 4 vertices (hold down shift key and
right click on them), then type F. A face will be created.
Ctrl-F will give a Face Specials menu of options that will
allow a larger set of closed vertices to be faced with
additional options. Using Alt- F will fill a larger area
automatically.

RoboDude Says: Adding and deleting faces and vertices are the basics in
any model construction. It is important to become comfortable with these
operations while knowing how to accurately work within your viewports.

3-17
Chapter
Chapter 1-
3- The Blender
Creating Interface
& Editing Objects
Boolean Operations:

Boolean operations allow you to cut or join meshes by using other meshes. In other
words, A mesh can be made combining 2 meshes different from the Join command.
When using Join, the 2 shapes still retain all vertices. When using Boolean, a new shape
is calculated (union) and removes interior geometry. A mesh can also be used to cut a
hole in another mesh (difference) and a shape can also be made from where the 2
shape intersect with one another (intersect).

In the sample shown below, a cube and a

sphere have been placed overlapping each
other. With the cube selected, we will be
applying a Boolean Modifier. This is the first
time we have accessed the Modifier buttons.
If the resolution of your computer if not set so
that you are able to see the Modifiers button,
hold down your mouse wheel to scroll over the
buttons to gain access to it.

Click on the Add Modifier button. You will

see a variety of modifiers that can be added
and many will be discussed later. For now,
select the Boolean modifier.

In the Boolean panel, you will

see a block where you can
select the object you wish to
use to modify the cube.
Clicking in the box will give
you a drop down of all
objects in the scene.
Selecting the sphere will display the changes to the cube. Below,
you can see what each option will display:

Intersection (what is shared) Union (joins the meshes) Difference (subtracts the mesh)
By hitting the Apply button, the new shape
becomes set and the sphere can be
removed.

3-18
`
Boolean Editing- Lighthouse Windows
To begin this exercise, start by opening up your Lighthouse
file from the previous exercise. We are going to use Boolean
operations to cut some simple windows in your lighthouse.

Begin by adding a Cube (Shift A-Add-Mesh-Cube) to your

scene and scale it to an appropriate size and shape. Using
your principle views of #1,#3, and #7, place the cube in a
good location for a window. With the cube still selected,
make note of the cube's name, displayed in the lower left
corner of the viewport. We will need to know that name
later. The name can also be changed in the Transform
window.

Now select the Lighthouse and enter Wireframe view (Z

key). Go to the Modifiers Panel and add a Boolean Modifier.
Select the Cube from
the list under Object. By
changing the Operation
from Intersect to
Difference, you should
see a cut in the
lighthouse to match the
cube. Hit Apply.

Now you can move the cube to a different spot and

add another Boolean modifier to cut another window
using Difference and Apply. You can even use
different mesh shapes to cut other window and door
shapes. Press F12 to see a rendered view of your
results.

Remember to add the Boolean Modifier to the

lighthouse and not the cube!

** Call the instructor when finished**

3-19
Chapter 1- The
Challenge Blender
Task- Interface
Logo Design
Scenario:
A local company or sports team wants you to design an animated logo for them. They
need the logo to be 3D and useful for their promotional needs.

For this exercise, you will be creating a 3D logo for a favorite team, company, product,
or school while using many of the techniques discussed in this chapter. Your first step is
to do an internet search for an image you wish to model from. I will be using a Blender
Logo for my example. Save that image on you computer, then in
Blender, erase the initial cube and open the Transform Panel if not
already open on the right side of the window (N key or the small +
in the upper right corner of the window). Scroll down the list and find
the Background Images panel. Check the box and open the panel.
You will see an Open button that will allow you to load your image.
Load your image and it should show up in the background of the 3D
window.

The image will only display in a principal

ortho view (7,1, or 3- 5 key switches
between ortho and perspective). You will
notice that you can control which views the
image displays in, if you want to display a
movie or image as a background, the
transparency of the image, the size and X,Y
offset.

Make sure you are in the Top Ortho View and create a Plane from
the Add-Mesh menu. Go to wireframe view (Z key) and Edit
Mode (Tab key). Delete 1 vertex so all you have are 3 vertices.

Your next step is to move the 3 existing

vertices to the edge of the shape where
you wish to start. Select an end vertex, press
E to Extrude and continue outlining your
shape. The more care you take in shaping,
the better the logo will look.
Continue around the shape
until you get back to the
beginning. While holding
down the Shift key, press F
to Face. This will connect the
2 ends and close the shape.
You will now have the basic
shape.

3-20
`
Challenge Task- Logo Design
The next step is to create the inner edge of the shape. To do
this you need to copy (not extrude) a vertex over to the
inner edge (Shift-D). From there, continue to extrude and
close the inner edge as you did with
the outer edge. Notice that the
Blender logo also has a blue inner
circle. We will also copy and extrude
a circle for that ring. If you have
other details to add, do that at this
time. Always stay in the Top View!

Before we face the mesh, we will need to separate

the vertices into different meshes that will receive
different materials. Select those vertices using the B
or C commands and hit P to partition or separate
them from the main mesh. For my example, I will
select the inner ring that will get a blue material.
After separating all the vertices, go back to Object
Mode.

It's now time to

face the mesh. We could select 3-4 vertices at a
time and hit F to face them, but that would
take a long time! Instead, we will use the Ctrl-F
menu. First, enter Edit Mode for one of your
meshes and make sure all vertices are selected
(A key). Hit Ctrl-F and
select Fill (or Alt-F to
save a step). If the shape
is complex, not closed, or
has double vertices
somewhere, this option
may not work and forces you to find the problem or face it
manually. Once it is filled, you may want to go back into the
Ctrl-F menu again and select the Tris-to-Quads option to
convert triangles to quads for less faces and a cleaner look. Do
this for all meshes, then switch to the Front View and Extrude the
meshes to a desired thickness, like you did with the lighthouse.

You logo is finished for now. We will not be addressing this as

an actual exercise, but after reading the chapter on Materials
and Textures, you can come back and add color to your logo.

** Call the instructor when finished**

3-21
Chapter
Chapter 1- The Blender Interface
3 Reflection
Chapter 3 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Creating & Editing Meshes

This was a long chapter with a lot of information provided, but being
able to create basic shapes in Blender is a primary skill. There are still a
lot of commands and techniques to learn to improve your 3D modeling
skills and many of these will be addressed in future chapters, however,
practice is the key to become a skilled artist. Answer the following questions in as much
detail as possible.

1. Your first task in this chapter had you working with basic meshes, trying to create
a sculpture, much like you would have used building blocks as a child. What was
your biggest challenge then and how would that challenge be different now that
you have completed the chapter and have a little more experience? Explain.

2. How did your lighthouse and landscape turn out? Are you pleased with your
results? What was the most difficult aspect of that project and how did you
overcome that challenge? Explain.

3. The logo challenge activity is designed to have you create a 3D logo much like
ones you would see at sporting events, in movies, and on T.V. Find a 3D
animated logo on the internet that interests you. Do you have a better
understanding now of how a logo like that is made? How has this chapter
shaped your understanding of 3D modeling? Explain.

4. Have these activities inspired you to create any projects of your own? What
would you like to create?

3-22
 Chapter 4- Blender Render Engines
What is a Render Engine?
As you make your 3D models in Blender, your goal will probably be to generate (render)
an image or a movie as a final result. The software that determines how your scene will
look is the render engine. The render engine will need to know how to handle materials
on your objects, how the lighting in your scene should react with reflections, refraction,
bounced ambient lighting, shadows, etc. While there are several 3 rd party engines out
there that can work with Blender, there are actually two engines built into the program:
the classic internal renderer and the newer cycles renderer. Every render engine will
generate different results depending on how it calculates the scene. Some render
engines will take a lot longer to generate an image than others. Cycles handles lighting
much better than the internal renderer, providing more realistic results.

Classic Render Engine Cycles Render Engine- 128 samples

So which one do you use?

That will depend on what you want for results. The classic internal engine will give you
faster results, but with less realism. The cycles engine will give you more realistic results,
but requires more set up time and much longer render times, depending on your
computer and graphics card (possibly minutes as opposed to hours). Because this book
is written for use in the classroom, all of the activities here use the classic render engine.
Time is a valuable commodity in school and we need to render as quickly as possible to
meet deadlines. Like most schools, we do not have the best video cards on the market,
making cycles a tough choice for us. Cycles is a work in progress and getting
improvements with every new release. Some students do choose to use cycles. In this
chapter and the next, we will discuss the basics of the cycles renderer and how to set
up basic materials. With that knowledge, you can decide which render engine you
would like to use for the activities. Both render engine will give you great results!

The Classic Render Engine:

Currently, by default, the classic Blender Render is
active when you launch Blender. You can change this in
the top header to Cycles Render or Blender Game.
The Blender Game engine rendering will be discussed in
a later chapter. For now, stay in Blender Render. We will discuss Cycles Render later.

4-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
4- The Blender
Blender Interfac
Render Engines
Materials and textures are what change your model from being gray to brilliant. We will
only discuss some basic material settings in this chapter so you can experiment with the
render engines. Materials will be detailed in the next chapter. Remember, we are
focusing on the classic internal renderer right now.

Basic Material Settings

To add a material, first select the object you want
to work with, then go to the Materials panel in the
Properties window. Click the New button (unless
you are working with the initial cube- that has a
material on it by default). You will see more options
open up. Right now, we are only interested in
changing color and glossiness.

Diffuse:
Diffuse is actually the color that is given off by the object- the
color you see. If you want the object to be red, set it here. You
will also see settings for the way the
material is calculated (default-Lambert)
and the intensity slider. The Ramp button
will allow diversity of color.

By clicking on the color sample in diffuse (or in any other block

dealing with a color), the color wheel will pop up. You can set the
color using the wheel and light/dark slider, setting in manually using
RGB, HSV, or Hex numbers. You'll also see an eyedropper for picking
a color elsewhere.

The Preview panel can be used to see the

results of your setting changes. You can also
change the default sphere preview shape
to something else.

Specular:
Specular settings control the glossiness of the object (is it flat or
shiny?) You will see a color sample, calculation model and
ramp as in Diffuse. The color sample indicates the color
reflected back (usually kept white). Intensity controls the
amount of glossiness while the hardness slider controls the
hardness and softness of the glow. Check the sample as you
change these settings to see how it changes appearance.

RoboDude Asks: How can I see all the panels on the screen?
It is impossible to see all of the panels at once, but you can scale the by pressing
the + and - keys on the number pad and pan with the mouse wheel.

4-2
 Chapter 4- Blender Render Engines
The Cycles Render Engine:
As mentioned before, you have a second option for rendering your projects. While the
classic render engine is still the default in Blender, Cycles continues to receive most of
the recent development and will likely become the default renderer in the near future.
Since cycles can produce more accurate results with reflected light and other effects, it
is more memory and is processor intensive. This is where your computer hardware makes
a big difference and a place where many high school labs can fall short. In our lab, we
have fast dual-core computers, loaded with RAM, but with integrated video cards. Due
to school district budgets, I think many schools are in the same boat. Because of this
factor, we can render simple scenes in Cycles, but as scenes become more complex,
we experience problems and need to rely on the classic renderer. Render farms, or
Network Rendering, (discussed in Chapter 8) can help you get through larger projects
as well. Expect detailed project in either render engine to take minutes to hours to
render a single image as you add more detail.

To access the Cycles render engine, switch from Blender

Render to Cycles Render at the top of the screen.

CPU or GPU?
By default, Blender and Cycles use the CPU (the computer processor) to render your
project. Because the CPU is doing everything to run your computer, the amount of
memory and the processor speed of your computer will determine how fast your
projects render. Newer computers have fast video cards, or GPU (the graphics
processor) and Cycles can be set to use the GPU instead of the CPU. If your computer
supports GPU, you can experiment to see which one works best for you.

To see if you have a choice between the two, go to the File menu- User
Preferences. Under the System tab, find the Compute Device options. If you see
an option of CUDA or OpenCL, the you have GPU rendering. If not, you are limited to
CPU rendering. You can try to update drivers, update your video card, or live with CPU
rendering. You will also need to select CPU or GPU under Device in Properties.
System option in
System option in Preferences menu with
Preferences menu CUDA GPU support.
with CPU support
only.

Render settings for

Cycles in the Render settings for Cycles in
Properties window. the Properties window. There
No option for is a Device option for you
Device when to select between CPU and
GPU is unsupported GPU when your computer
by your computer. support GPU rendering.

4-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
4- The Blender
Blender Interfac
Render Engines
Node-Based Rendering:

Cycles rendering is entirely different than

classic rendering in that Cycles is node-
based, or rather blocks, designed to be
connected together to produce your results.
Nodes can be confusing to work with, but
you can set up your basic materials and
textures in the Properties window, similar to
the way we construct them with the classic
renderer to make life easier. You can then
adjust your results by adding and adjusting
nodes in the Nodes window. As you work with
Cycles, this will become easier. With a little research on the internet, you will find a lot of
tutorials for creating specific effects with nodes.

In-Viewport Rendering:

A nice feature of Cycles is that you can view your

render results in the viewport without the need for
pressing F12. While this feature also works to some
degree in the classic rendered, you can control the
results better in Cycles. If you press the shading button
at the bottom of the 3D View window, you can select
Rendered from the list of options.

Cycles Render Quality Control- Samples:

Cycles renders will look grainy by default. While the

complete explanation is complex, what is essentially
happening in Cycles is that the image quality will continue
to improve over time with each sample and you can control
the number of samples (found in the Render Properties
menu) in the viewport and in the final render (F12). Usually
you want a lower Preview sample number for faster work
in the viewport and a higher number for the final Render.
Depending on your computer speed and the complexity of
the scene, the higher the better, but you need to find a
balance of quality and time. Professionals may render
samples in the thousands.

RoboDude Asks: Why is Blender running so slow in Cycles?

If you have your viewport in Rendered view instead of Solid
view and the Preview samples set too high, you will be limited
in what you can do as it process the samples. Try a lower sample
rate.

4-4
 Chapter 4- Blender Render Engines
Lighting in Cycles:

We will look at lighting settings more in chapter

7, but basically, to illuminate your scene
correctly in Cycles, you will not be able to use
traditional Blender lamps adequately. Cycles
uses mesh objects, set to Emission in the
material settings. This is because traditional
Blender lamps project from a pin-point location
where real lamps project from larger areas, like a
light bulb would project more from a spherical
object. Planes work great to light Cycles scenes.

Basic Material Settings in Cycles:

As mentioned before, Cycles is a node-based render

engine, but we can use the Materials properties panel to
do some basic setup, similar to the classic render engine.
After switching to the Cycles renderer, adjusting your
processor (CPU or GPU), and setting the Samples, you
are now ready to apply some basic materials.

With the object selected, go to the Materials property

panel. You will notice settings are presented differently
than in the classic renderer. Start by pressing the Use
Nodes button.

By default, you will see Diffuse BSDF as the default

node setting under the Surface panel. BSDF stands for
Bidirectional Scattering Distribution Function. An elaborate
term that basically means what happens to the light when it
hits an object. Is it reflected, absorbed, or transmitted through
the material for transparency or refraction. Diffuse is used
exactly like it is in the classic render
engine- the light reflected, with no
glossiness. Below the surface setting
you will see a color swatch, roughness
(smooth or rough) and default normal
mapping. Clicking on the Diffuse
block, more options are displayed.

While we we look at more details in

the next chapter, we will examine 4
surface options here: Diffuse, Glossy,
Emission, and the Mix Shader.

4-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
4- The Blender
Blender Interfac
Render Engines
Emission:
Plane used as a
Remember we mentioned earlier that lamp with an
we do not use lights in cycles as we Emission surface
normally do in the classic render material.
engine. In real life, we see the light
emitting from our lamps. In the classic
render engine type lights, we never
see the actual lamp. If you create a
sphere or pane to represent your light
source, you would place an Emission
shader on the object and adjust the
strength of the emission.

Diffuse:
The cube to the left is using a Diffuse surface
material with some roughness applied. The
roughness may not be very apparent
depending on how many samples you are
rending at. Try a higher sample rate for
better quality (discussed on page 4-4).

Glossy:
A sphere has been added to the
scene on the right with a Glossy
surface material added with a blue
color. A glossy surface by itself will be
a perfect mirror. This is where it is
important to mix your surface shaders.

Mix Shader:
A Mix Shader was selected on the left.
You will notice that when a Mix
Shader is used, you can now add two
more shaders below to combine
effects and the balance of the two
effects is controlled by the Fac slider
directly below the Mix Shader (the
percentage to use of each). In this
example, Diffuse and Glossy shaders
were used on the cube, which gives
the cube color and reflction. A Mix
Shader could also be added to the
2nd slot to mix even more together.

4-6
 Chapter 4- Blender Render Engines
RoboDude Says:
The Blender Guru website has a nice page dedicated to the different Cyles shaders
and can be found here:
http://www.blenderguru.com/articles/cycles-shader-encyclopedia/

Your Material Setting in Node View:

Now that you have some basic materials set in Cycles, in

order to see them in a Node view, change your 3D View
window to the Node Editor window (found at the bottom-
left corner of your viewport).

Here are some of the basic parts of the Node Editor

window. More details will be discussed throughout the
manual and activities.

Tool Shelf- Displays the many

nodes available. (closed)
Currently selected
node settings.
Display of connected nodes.
These represent the current
material.

Browse to display
different materials
Which nodes to
display. Currently set to Check to tell Blender
Add button- display object nodes. to use nodes.
to add nodes.

With experience, many people set all of their material properties in the Node Editor
window. We will also examine times in future chapters where you can start in the
material properties panel and then add additional features in the node editor window.

Working with nodes can be confusing and knowing how to connect them can be more
of a challenge. While we will examine the basics of Cycles in this book, the internet is an
excellent resource for additional learning.

4-7
Chapter
Chapter 1-
4- The Blender
Blender Interfac
Render Engines
Tweaking Cycles for Speed & Quality:

So what can you do to speed up renders in Cycles? We already talked about adjusting
the sample rates on page 4-4, but what else can you do to speed things up? Ken
Murphy from Southwest Minnesota State University shared some setting options he uses
with his class to speed up the rendering times while giving results similar to the Blender
internal render engine. Here are some setting options:

In the Render property settings, change the following

in the Light Paths panel:

Transparency: Set the minimum and maximum

settings to zero, unless you have transparent objects
in your scene. If you need this, try a low number (2-3).
The default settings are 8 for both minimum and
maximum.

Bounces: Set the minimum and maximum settings to

zero, unless you have transparent objects in your
scene. If you need this, try a low number (2-3). The
default settings are 3 minimum and 12 for maximum.

Uncheck Shadows and both Caustic settings.

In the World property settings, change the following:

Uncheck all option in the Ray Visibility panel except

Camera.

In the Settings panel, uncheck the Multiple

Importance setting.

The type of lamps you use will also contribute to your results. While using meshes with an
emission shader is ideal in Cycles, a traditional Hemi lamp may provide sharp shadows.

4-8
 Test Renders & Unit Reflection
Create a simple scene similar to the one below. Place the camera and lamp in good
locations to get a render similar to the one shown below. You will start in the classic
Blender Render engine. Use only one lamp to light your scene. Save this Blender file as
Test Render 1, then use the save as command to save a second file called Test
Render 2. You will be experimenting with color and glossiness in this activity.

For your Test Render 1 file using the classic renderer, press F12 to render an image,
then immediately press F3 to save a .png image file of your render. Check your saving
location and title it Test Render 1.png. (do not forget the .png at the end)

Now open your Test Render 2 file and switch to the Cycles Render. Replace the
lamp with a UV Sphere and put an Emission surface shader on it. Adjust the strength
for a good output. Add appropriate material shaders to your other objects in Cycles.
Set your render samples as high as your computer will allow for an appropriate render
time. Press F12 to render this new image, then press F3 to save the image as Test
Render 2.png. (do not forget the .png at the end)

**Call the instructor when finished**

4-9
Chapter
Chapter 1- The Blender Interfac
4 Reflection

Chapter 4 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Both render engines have their pros and cons and both can be
difficult to master. Compare your two render results and answer the
following questions:

1. Look at the lighting effects in both images. You used one light in each, but have
different results. Which one looks more realistic? Why?

2. In Cycles, graininess is determined by the number of samples. Why does the

image improve with higher samples? Research and explain why.

3. Which render engine do you like the best and why?

4. You have had a comparison of Blender's two render engines in this chapter, but
how does Cycles compare to another program's render engine? Conduct an
internet research of another render engine that can be used with other
commercial animation programs. Explain your findings.

4-10
 Chapter 5- Materials & Textures
As mentioned in the past chapter, materials and textures are what change your model
from being gray to brilliant. You can add color, make things glow, become transparent
like glass or make them look like brick, grass, stone, metal, fabric, wallpaper, etc.
Remember, we are focusing on the classic internal renderer right now.

Basic Material Settings

You must always add a material before you can
add a texture. To add a material, first select the
object you want to work with. Then go to the
Materials panel in the Properties window. Then
click the New button (unless you are working
with the initial cube- that has a material on it by
default). You will see more options open up. The
material block is used to change some of the
physical properties of the object in how it looks. If you plan on using just straight color
and no texture, this is where you set the objects color. The panels can float around so
they may not be in this order, but here is what you see with all panels collapsed:
Add a new material or duplicate
List of all materials the one currently selected
linked to object
Browse list of all Change the material name here
materials in file
How to display the material:
Preview Sample Surface- Normal mode
Wire- Render as a wireframe
Diffuse- The actual color of Volume- useful for smoke
the object settings simulations
Halo- Gives verticies a glow
Shading- Control self
emitting light and ambient Different ways to display the
lighting effects sample
Subsurface Scattering- Specular- controls the objects
effects for final rendering glossiness settings
Strands- used for hair and Mirror-Transparency- Raytrace
grass efects settings will be discussed in a
Shadow- setting related to later chapter
how the object casts and Options- a few setting related to
receives shadows the world and rendering

This is just an overview of the basic material panels. On the next page, we will highlight
some of the important panels we will be using at this time.
RoboDude Asks: How can I see all the panels on the screen?
Remember panels can be collapsed and opened as needed to streamline your
view. You can also scroll with the mouse wheel!

5-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
5- The Blender
Materials Interface
& Textures
Material Panels:
Here are some of the basic material panels and settings. Some
of this will be a review from the past chapter:
Diffuse:
Diffuse is actually the color that is given off by the object. If you
want the object to be red, set it here. You will also see settings
for the way the material is calculated
(default-Lambert) and the intensity slider. The
Ramp button will allow diversity of color.

By clicking on the color sample in diffuse (or in any other block dealing
with a color), the color wheel will pop up. You can set the color using
the wheel and light/dark slider, setting in manually using RGB, HSV, or
Hex numbers. You'll also see an eyedropper for picking a color
elsewhere.

Specular:
Specular settings control the glossiness of the object (is it flat or shiny?) You will see a
color sample, calculation model and ramp as in Diffuse. The color
sample indicates the color reflected back (usually kept white).
Intensity controls the amount of glossiness while the hardness slider
controls the hardness and softness of the glow. Check the sample as
you change these settings to see how it changes appearance.
Shading:
If you want something to glow, even in low light, adjust the Emit slider.
Ambient light allows the object to also react as if indirect light were
hitting it. There are also a few other shading settings here as well.
Transparency:
For now, we will only look at using the Z Transparency option
(Raytrace has it's own chapter). After checking the Transparency box
and Z Transparency selected, you can control how transparent an
object is using the Alpha slider.
SubSurface Scattering:
Is used to improve rendering for materials where light enters the material and
leaves through another point (like skin).

Strands:
Strands are used to represent hair or grass when used with particle systems
(discussed in a later chapter). With strand settings, you can control the
root and tip width of the strand.
Shadow:
There are time when you do not want an object to be able to cast a
shadow and times when it doesn't receive shadows properly from
objects with transparent materials or ray-tracing features. Those options
are controlled in this panel.

5-2
 Chapter 5- Materials & Textures
Transparency Using Z-Transparency:

The easiest way to make something transparent in Blender while still

maintaining a fast render speed is to use the Z-Transparency feature
and controlling the Alpha setting. In the Material panel, turn on
Transparency and select Z-Transparency, then slide the Alpha control
down. Press the F12 button to render
an image. If you need features like distortion
(refraction), then you will need to use Raytrace
Transparent. Refraction is the effect you get like
looking through a magnifying glass or a crystal. Avoid
using Ray features at this time. They are discussed in a
later chapter.

Z-Transparent material

Halo Settings
By using Halos on objects, you are basically only making the vertices visible when
rendered. Halo effects give you a star-like image on every vertex. Sometimes, it adds a
nice effect to take a plane and delete all vertices except for one. This one vertex can
be used like a shooting star or a Tinkerbell effect in an animation. Tie it to a particle
effect (discussed in a later chapter) and you can produce some
interesting results. When you press the Halo button in the material
panel, here are your options:
Turn ON Halo Halo glow only

Rings only

Lines only
Halo Transparency

Star only
Halo Color and Hardness

Check to add rings, count Rings, Lines

and color and Star

Check to add lines, count

and color
Halos can also be animated to give a variety of
Check to add stars and tips effects. Animation basics are discussed in a later
chapter. There are also other options with halos not
discussed. Halos are also used to control the size
Flare adds additional rings and appearance of particles in smoke and fire
and effects effects. These will also be discussed in a later
chapter. Feel free to experiment!

5-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
5- The Blender
Materials Interface
& Textures
Basic Textures Settings
After you create a material and would like to add some
kind of texture to the object (i.e. brick, carpet, wood
grain, etc), you then click on the Texture button beside
the Material button. After you click the New button,
you have some choices in the texture buttons. First, you
need to decide if you wish to use one of Blenders
preloaded texture generators or provide your own image
as a texture. Blender is capable of using almost any
image file type whether created in a paint program or is
a photographic image. JPEG images are most common. Blender can even place a
movie on an object as a material! This is a good effect if you want to add animation
within your animation.

Here's what you see in the texture panel: Texture Channels:

You can add multiple textures to an object. For
example, lets say you want a marble texture on
an object, but also want to add a roughness to
the surface. You would add a texture for both
effects.
Texture Name:
Like materials, it's a good idea to name your
textures. In this area, you can also add + and
deleteX materials.

Texture Type:
Choose between built-in texture generators for
wood, marble, stucci, etc or select an image or
movie.
Mapping:
Setting that control how the texture is mapped
onto the object. Also control the size and offset
of the texture on the object. Mapping used to
always be set to Generated, but is now set to
UV by default. Change it to Generated.
Influence:
Settings that control appearance such as
brightness, transparency, glossiness and
roughness. S are also effected by the Material
setting. Materials and textures work together.
Many textures use a secondary color in their
generation. That is also controlled in this panel.

RoboDude Says:
You cant add a texture unless youve
already added a material. Material and
Texture properties work together!

5-4
 Chapter 5- Materials & Textures
Blender's Built-In Textures:

Lets say you want to use one of Blenders built-in textures

(under the Type option). For now, we just want to look
at Clouds, Stucci, Magic, Marble and Wood. These can
produce some interesting effects with a little practice.
When you select one, setting options will open for that
effect. Each texture has different tools available to work
with, but some similarities are present in most:

Most of Blenders texture options deal with turbulence

and noise (randomness of the pattern) The wood texture
also has some features dealing with the pattern of the
wood grain (bands and rings). After you place the
texture, you still need to go back to the Materials Buttons
to fine tune the look on your object. The Stucci texture
involves a little more work and will be discussed later in
this chapter.

Many textures have a Noise Basis for

different texture effects.

5-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
5- The Blender
Materials Interface
& Textures
For an example of using textures, we will apply a wood texture to a
cube. We'll start with a basic cube that has a material applied to it.
Since wood is usually various shades of brown, we'll make the Diffuse
color brown. We'll also take Specular Intensity down a bit.

We'll now go over to the texture buttons and add a

new texture. Make the texture type Wood. In the
wood texture panel you will see some different ways
to represent the wood grain. Sine-Saw-Tri will give
you a different stripe while Bands-Rings-Band
Noise-Ring Noise will give you a different pattern.
For my example, I will select Ring Noise and hit
F12 to render a picture. For these exercises,
remember to switch UV to Generated in the
Mapping Panel!

If you look at your render, you should see your wood grain, but
you have a secondary color that needs to be
corrected! To fix this, scroll down through your
texture panels to find the color swatch to
change this to a better color. I will choose a
darker brown.

You can also adjust the Size (X,Y,Z) of the

texture and the Noise Basis for more
effects. Feel free to
experiment with the
various other settings.

The Stucci Texture:

The Stucci texture provides interesting effect on the surface of your object. In the
Texture Buttons, select it as you do for any of the other texture generators and adjust
the settings. In the Stucci panel, I will adjust the size to 0.15. Next, go down to the
Influence panel and turn on Nor (for Normal) under
Geometry for normal. Adjusting the Normal slider to adjust
the amount of the effect. Play with the setting to get a bumpy
effect. Turning the size setting way down can also give you a
grainy effect.
Below are some samples of different Noise Basis patterns.

Normal Off

Normal On

5-6
 Chapter 5- Materials & Textures
Using Images and Movies as Textures
The basic texture generators are nice, but not complete. Most of the time you need to
place textures like grass, brick, metal, fabrics and such into your model. Anything that
can be saved as a JPEG image can be used as a texture in Blender. Most other image
type files can be used as well (png, targa, TIFF, bmp). If you want to put a picture of
your face on an object- you can! Movie files can also be placed on an object as a
material. To use a JPEG as a texture, add a Material as before, go to the Texture
buttons and select the Image or Movie option under Type.
When you select this, here is what you see for options:
Texture Type:
Changed to Image or Movie
Preview Window:
Can be set to display Texture or Material or Both
Colors Panel:
An image can be adjusted if colors are not quite what
you want (i.e. a wood grain that you may want more
red in it)
Mapping Panel:
Textures can be projected Flat, Cube, Tube, or Sphere
onto an object. Important block! Here, you can also
adjust the offset and size of an image on your object.
Coordinate Mapping:
New default settings have this set to UV, which
will be discussed in a later chapter. Change this
to Generated for these lessons.
Image Panel:
This is actually where you open the image or movie you
with to use for your texture. If you don't see thumbnails of
your images, you can change the window's viewing type
(see page 1-4 for details).
Image Sampling Panel:
Make adjustments to your image such as Alpha
(transparent images). For example, you have a tree
image made in a graphics program with a transparent
background. Set alpha here to remove that
background.
Image Mapping Panel:
If you would like to have the texture repeat (i.e. a brick
pattern where you need to use the image several times
on a surface), set it here. You also have mirror options in
case the image you're using doesn't appear seamless.

Remember to switch UV to Generated in the

Mapping Panel! UV Mapping will be discussed in a
future chapter.

5-7
Chapter
Chapter 1-
5- The Blender
Materials Interface
& Textures
For an example of using images, here is a cube and
sphere rendered using a brick image. You will notice
that, by default, the image is mapped onto the top
and stretched down the sides of the object. This is
called Flat mapping. This can be adjusted in the Mapped Flat
Mapping panel. Your other options are shown
below:

Mapped Cube Mapped Tube Mapped Sphere

RoboDude Asks: Ive worked with all these settings, but the texture still wont
map correctly- whats wrong?
Textures can be affected by rotation and scaling of objects. Try pressing Ctrl-A
to reset scale and rotation.

Let's say I want to use the Cube mapping, but the

bricks are too large. I can control this in the Image
Mapping panel under the Repeat option. The
image I used tiles well, but if it does not you can press
the Mirror- X and Y buttons.

Remember that
the Material
and Texture
panels work together. The bricks look good, but
a bit too glossy and flat. You can make
adjustments to Specular in Materials (glossiness)
and add a Normal to the brick texture in the
Texture panel under the Influence panel. This
will simulate depth and add a nice effect to the
brick.

Movies as Textures:

You load a movie just as you would load an image,

except that you have a few other options. You can
control which frames of the movie to use, when it starts
(offset) and if the movie cycles through your animation.
This can be a great option for animated backgrounds, Mapped Flat
and motion on objects. Remember that all movie
formats may not be supported.

5-8
 Chapter 5- Materials & Textures
Displacement Mapping
Displacement Mapping is using a texture effect to deform the mesh. Basically, you can
make a cube, sphere, etc. look wrinkled or deformed without having to move vertices
around to do it. To start, create a cube or sphere. If you start
with a cube, go into Edit Mode (tab) and select all vertices,
press the Subdivide button a few times in the Tool Shelf.
Displacement works off of vertices so if you dont have it
subdivided a few times, you wont get a good effect. Next,
put a material and a texture on the object. I used the Cloud
texture in Blender. Here's what we have by pressing F12:

Nothing that we havent

already experienced in
this chapter so far. Now,
go to the Influence panel and find the
Displacement button to turn on Displacement and
adjust the slider. Re-render (F12). Displacement
basically works by pushing vertices with the varying
colors in the texture. This is also controllable.

For our next test, I

will create a simple
image in a graphics
program using only
simple gray, white
and black shapes.
Gray is considered
the base color.

Here are the effects of the image on the object mapped with the Cube wrap. Notice
that the white shape was pushed out while the black shapes went in. The quality of the
cuts and extrudes is determined by the subdivision (vertices) on the mesh.

To the right, the shape

has been subdivided a
few more times for a
better edge. While
Normal gives the illusion
of depth, Displacement
will actually deform, but
it makes the shape
more complicated and
slower to render.
5-9
Chapter
Chapter 1-
5- The Blender
Materials Interface
& Textures
Materials & Textures in Cycles
We will now discuss Cycles materials and textures in more detail.
Switch your render engine from Blender Render to Cycles
Render. Remember to set you processor and samples as discussed
in the previous chapter.

Basic Material Settings in Cycles:

We have already discussed the Diffuse,
Glossy, Emission, and Mix Shader nodes in the
last chapter. Surface shaders can be applied
in the Materials properties panel, but can
also be applied in the Node Editor window
through the Tool Shelf or from the Add
button at the bottom of the window. Here are some of the other shaders:

Ambient Occlusion- can be used to add darker shading to

recessed areas and corners.
Anisotropic- can act like the glossy shader, but will distort the
reflection in a direction.
Diffuse- just like diffuse in the classic render engine, the color for
the object with no reflection at all, like flat paint.
Emission- used to light your scene. Can be mixed wit other
shaders.
Glass- makes an object look like glass. You can control distortion
using the IOR (index of refraction) setting.
Glossy- add a chrome or mirror look or mixed with other shaders
to control the amount of gloss.
Hair- Used with particle strands for hair or a fur look.
Holdout- create holes in your render, good for creating overlays.
Mix Shader- used to combine shaders for blended effects.
Refraction- acts like glass, but distortion only and no reflection.
Subsurface Scattering- scatters light beneath the surface, like in
a wax candle.
Toon- used to simulate cartoon-type material shading.
Translucent- lets light pass trough it, like paper or stained glass.
Transparent- completely transparent or tinted or combined.
Velvet- great for cloth. Gives a velvet effect.
Volume Absorption- affects the volume, not the surface. Gets
darker the deeper it goes.
Volume Scatter- scatters the light that passes through it. Good
for clouds and smoke.

RoboDude Says:
The Blender Guru website has a nice page dedicated to the different Cyles shaders
and can be found here:
http://www.blenderguru.com/articles/cycles-shader-encyclopedia/

5-10
 Chapter 5- Materials & Textures
Basic Texture Settings in Cycles:
In the classic render engine, textures are applied after materials
in the properties panel. Cycles does not use the textures panel
at all. Textures in Cycles are applied to a Diffuse shader node,
with other nodes being used for more control. Like textures in the
classic render engine, there are several built-in texture
generators in Cycles.

To start using textures, apply a Diffuse shader to an object, then

click on the small button on the Color setting option. When
you click the button, you will see a column of texture options,
like the image displayed to the left.

Like the material shaders, texture shaders can be accessed from

the Node Editor window Tool Shelf as well. Here are the basic texture nodes available:

Brick- can be used to simulate a brick texture on an object. Settings

for colors, size, motor joints, etc.
Checker- creates a checkerboard effect on your object.
Environment- used to project background images in the world.
Gradient- used to generate a gradient fade across your object.
Image- uses an image file to project on your object.
Magic- creates a colorful tie died look.
Musgrave- can create a very organic pattern, like stucci in the
classic render engine.
Noise- a random TV-like static pattern. Different for every frame.
Point Density- Used for particles and volume.
Sky- used in the world setting to generate sky effect.
Voronoi- cells, skin, hammered metal look.
Wave- takes the place of wood and marble textures.

Create a simple scene and experiment with the various texture nodes and settings to
get a feel for how they work. Some of these nodes are designed to work with the world,
or background, settings and will be discussed in more detail in the world chapter.

So How Real Do You Want It To Look?

So far, we have only been applying materials and textures in the materials property
panel, but the strength of Cycles is in the Nodes Editor window. Understanding how to
connect the various nodes and which ones to use can be a difficult learning process
that few people have mastered. 3D modelers are always trying different things and
posting their results on the internet to share with others, so make use of that wealth of
knowledge. 3D modeling, animation and texturing is a process in the study of nature.
How realistic do you want your model to look? Many people have gone to great
lengths to use material shading nodes to achieve realistic effects. The following
examples will help you in the journey into understanding Cycles shading.

5-11
Chapter
Chapter 1-
5- The Blender
Materials Interface
& Textures
Basic Color with Gloss:
The next several examples will work with
various shader nodes for the plane. This
scene is using simple Mix, Diffuse, and
Glossy nodes on the plane. You will
notice that nodes have multiple input
(left side) and output (right side)
connection points. Nodes can also
be collapsed by clicking the small
triangle in the top of the block.
Nodes are connected and
Use Factor to balance disconnected by dragging lines to
color and gloss. and from connection points. You
will notice some of the same terms used in the materials property panel, like Roughness
to control surface smoothness, Factor for the amount and balance of the nodes, and
Color to control the color settings. You will also notice that other nodes can be
connected to many of these settings to control them.
Basic Image and Gloss with Roughness:
While most of these settings can be handles in the materials properties panel, some
need to added in the Node Editor.

Map the texture Flat, Cube, Tube,

or Sphere, as we did on page 5-8
Mix node set
to Multiply.

Notice we have a few more nodes in this

sequence. A Mix shader was used that
combines a Diffuse shader set to an
Image Texture and Glossy shader. We
have added a Mapping node from the
Vector node menu. This is used to scale
the image we used to make it look like there are more stones. The Texture Coordinate
node (from the Input node menu) is set to Generated, like we have used before, and
is tied to the Mapping vector input. In order to make the stones look like they are
three-dimensional with mortar joints, we have added a MixRGB node from the Color
node menu and set it to Multiply, setting the factor to a higher number to adjust the
depth appearance. This node is tied between Image Texture and Material Output
nodes on the Displacement connection. Displacement simulates texture depth.

5-12
 Chapter 5- Materials & Textures
Basic Glass:
While you can use just the Glass shader alone, It often works better when mixed with
a Transparent shader. The IOR (index of refraction for distortion), Color, and the mix
Factor can all be adjusted for the desired look.

Texture Displacement and Polished Metal:

This example demonstrates two shading examples. The monkey on the left uses a wood
image texture, mapped flat using generated texture coordinates on the vector and
using displacement. The monkey on the right uses a simple mix shader. The Glossy node
color was set to a light
yellow color from white
to better complement
the Diffuse color. Notice
the reflection on the
yellow monkey from the
floor.

What do the different node connection points mean?

Even the people most experienced with Cycles on the web seem to ask this question
from time-to-time. Nodes are basically a data processing pipeline with inputs and
outputs. Experimenting with them is the best way to learn them. Some of the term you
need to know are:

Image- The basic connections that pass the image results through the block.
Factor- Controls the amount of influence in the node. Mix nodes balance the 2 inputs.
Vector- Basically determine how your texture will be mapped on your object.
Displacement- Like normal in Blender internal renderer. Simulates texture depth.
BSDF and Shader- Connect like the Image connections to blend and mix results.

5-13
Chapter
Chapter 1-
5- The Blender
Materials Interface
& Textures
Stone Materials:
Creating stone textures in Cycles can also be a challenge with very realistic results
possible. Here are some basic setup options to get you started:

The monkey on the left uses a

Noise texture and a Voronoi
texture, set to Cells to create a
rough, cracked material. Both are
run through Color Ramps (found in
the Converter nodes menu) to
control the color effect. We use 2
Mix nodes (from the Color nodes
menu) with one set to Value.

It is finally mixed with

the Noise texture and
connect to the
Displacement output.
Adjust all values to get
the effect your desire.

The monkey on the right also uses

a Noise texture with a Color Ramp
node that is mixed with a Glossy
shader. The Wave texture and
Color Ramp are connected to an
Mix node set to Multiply to control
the Displacement roughness.
Experiment with the wave settings
to get the effect you desire.

Simple Brushed Aluminum:

The Anisotropic shader can simulate a texture with distortion set to a direction.

5-14
 Classic Materials & Textures
In this activity, we will be using the classic render engine to put put materials and
textures on the lighthouse and scene. We will also introduce you to the ocean
simulation modifier to create some realistic looking rough water for our stormy scene.

Start by opening up your Landscape Scene. Make sure you are in the Blender Render
Select the plane(right-click) and go to the Materials panel. Add a new material.

By default, it will be Material, probably with some zeros and

numbers after it. Create an appropriate name. The name block
may be small on your screen.

Under Diffuse, click on the color swatch

to open the Color Wheel and select a
shade of green. You can select a shade
of green 2 ways- by using the RGB sliders
at the bottom of the panel or by moving
the dot in the wheel, then adjusting the
brightness with the white-to-black slider
on the side. I know this doesnt look too realistic at this point, but we
will apply a nice soil/grass texture in the next exercise. For now, youre
just working with material basics.

5-15
Chapter 1- The Blender
Classic Materials Interface
& Textures

Since ground usually isnt glossy, Take the Intensity slider

down to 0 (or almost 0) in the Specular panel. I would leave
the color white here.

Now that youve adjusted the color and glossiness in the materials panel, Press F12 to
render a new image.
Looks better than gray, but still
needs more work. We will apply a
texture to the mesh soon.
Remember that you always need to
place a material on an object
before you can add a texture. For
future reference, if we were
planning to apply an image
(picture) as a texture, you would not
need to adjust the color. However,
you would still need to adjust
specular as needed.
Lighthouse:
Now, open your Lighthouse model so we can work on the materials, textures, and a few
other details. We will come back to the landscape later.

Lets start by cutting up your lighthouse so we can apply separate materials and
textures as needed. Switch to a front view (#1), and enter Edit mode (tab). Make sure
you are in wireframe view (Z key). Deselect all vertices using the A key (remember-
deselected vertices are pink, selected vertices are yellow). Zoom in on the top portion
of your lighthouse.

Begin by box selecting (B key) the top of the lighthouse

(roof only) as shown. We will separate these vertices from
the rest of the mesh, making it easier to apply a different
material and texture to that part of the lighthouse. Press
the P key to partition
(separate) and choose the
Selected option. The top
of the lighthouse is now a
separate mesh.

Now select all the vertices that form the walkway with the
box selection and separate them using P.

5-16
 Classic Materials & Textures

Lastly, select all the vertices that form the lighted area of
the lighthouse and separate them using P.

Exit edit mode (tab) and zoom out to see the entire
lighthouse. The base of the lighthouse should be
selected. Go to the Material buttons. Select New
and name the material LH Base.
Change the Specular Intensity
setting down to 0.1. This will keep the
gloss down. We do not need to set a
color in the RGB sliders since we will `
be applying an image texture to the
mesh. Just to check our results so far,
Press F12 for a render.
If you notice any strange effects when rendering,
it is the result of separating the mesh. Try entering
Edit Mode, select all vertices and use the
Recalculate Normals, or Remove Doubles
options in the Tool Shelf. The may even be the
possibility that you have a double mesh.
Now its time to add a stone image in the texture
buttons. You will need to find a texture to use. You
can search the internet for free stone textures,
look through the Blender websites for free textures,
or go to www.cdschools.org/blenderbasics for a
compiled zip file. Once you have
some saved images, go to the
Texture buttons and select the
Image or Movie option. Hit Open
in the Image panel and find a
texture you would like to use. Hit F12 to render an image:

Looks a bit distorted. The texture is being mapped UV and Flat by default
which means it is being mapped to the top plane
and stretched down the sides. To fix this, go to the
Mapping panel and change the Coordinates to
Generated and Projection from Flat to Tube.
Render another picture and you should see an improvement.

5-17
Chapter 1- The Blender
Classic Materials Interface
& Textures
The image should now wrap around the lighthouse nicely, but the
stones may be a bit large. The image may also look a bit flat. It would
be nice to simulate some depth to that stone texture.

To change the image size, find the X and Y

Repeat buttons in the Image Mapping panel. .
Change them from 1 to a higher number. For
this example, we used 5 for each, but
depending on the texture you used, it may be
different. If your image shows a bad line at the
seams, try clicking the Mirror buttons by each
repeat setting. This will mirror the image to
minimize repeats.

In order to simulate depth to the stone,

add a Normal to the stone texture in
Textures under the Influence panel. This will simulate depth and
add a nice effect to the stone. Some texture will work better with
this than others due to color contrast. Render another image to
check your results.

Continue doing this for all parts of your lighthouse to get the look
you wish. You can also use straight materials on some parts. Our
next step is to cut some windows in the top of the lighthouse. Feel
free to try some of Blender's built-in texture generators.

Here's the final result of my texturing. A second lamp was

added for better rendering. I decided to go with a straight
color of red for the light area and a stucci
texture with the size set as small as
possible and the secondary color set to
gray on the walkway to simulate
stone/concrete.

Since the lighthouse will be toward the

back of our final scene, it doesn't need to
be photo realistic.

5-18
 Classic Materials & Textures
It's now time to cut some windows to let the light shine out. We will do this easily by
deleting faces in edit mode.

First, select the tube mesh and enter edit mode (tab). Change from selecting vertices
to faces. (see page 3-5 if you forget). You'll also want to switch from wireframe view to
solid shading (Z key) and hit the button to limit selection to visible. You will need to
select every 3 faces and delete faces. You will leave 1 face (as the post between the
windows), and delete the next 3 faces. Continue all the way around. Since there are 32
divisions, it should work
out perfectly all the
Delete groups of 3 faces, leave one
way around.

With the faces

deleted, exit Edit
mode and render a
picture with F12. Your
lighthouse should look
something like the
picture below.

Solid Shading Face Select Limit to Visible

Now that were done texturing and editing the lighthouse, its
time to join the meshes back together. In Object Mode, select
all the meshes by RMB (right-mouse-button) clicking on them
while holding down the Shift key. Hit Ctrl-J and confirm the
operation. The lighthouse should once again be a single
mesh. You should also have a final
rendered view, fully textured! After
joining your meshes, you now have
one mesh with multiple materials
and can see them listed in the
material panel. You may need to go
back and adjust them after joining,
but should not need much.

Now its time to save the Lighthouse file and bring up the
Landscape Scene again.

5-19
Chapter 1- The Blender
Classic Materials Interface
& Textures
Its now time to find a nice grass/dirt texture to use on our ground and repeat the same
process we used for the lighthouse. Since we already have a material from the previous
lesson, we can use it. Take Specular Intensity down since it shouldnt be shiny. Add a
new texture and load an image of your choice. Use the X and Y repeat setting as
needed and apply Normal to show depth. You may want to keep this image Mapped
Flat. Heres the final result with a grass/dirt image that repeats well:

It is now time to add some water to our scene. While we can add a simple plane with
some textures to simulate water, we want our scene to look like a dark and stormy
night, so we will make use of a modifier in Blender that will simulate a turbulent ocean.
Modifiers will be discussed in more detail in a later chapter.

Add a Plane to your

scene and move it up
to a level that will
cover the ocean floor,
like shown here. Do
not worry about
scaling it at this time.

5-20
 Classic Materials & Textures
With the water plane selected, go to the Modifiers
panel, select Add Modifier and the Ocean
modifier.

The plane will become large at this point. Scale (S-

key) the plane down to the size of the landscape.
Move it up or down if necessary to have a correct
location for the water, similar as shown:

You will see some ocean

wave effects, but not
quite enough, so we will
now make some
adjustments to the
ocean simulation setting.

In the Ocean Modifier panel, Try adjusting these settings:

Resolution- 20
Choppiness- 4.00
Scale- 1.00
Feel free to experiment with any of the other settings, but
this should give you a nice wave form.

Lets work on the water materials and textures. Create a material and
select an bluish diffuse color. Keep Specular Intensity high since water is
glossy. We will be using Blenders built in cloud texture type instead of an
image for this one. Go to the Texture buttons and add a Cloud texture and
change UV to Generated. If you render a picture, you will see the original
blue and the pink color. Go back to the Texture buttons and change the
secondary color in the Influence panel to a shade of blue/gray.

Remember that our goal is to have a stormy night so pick colors that would reflect that
type of scene. Adjust both colors (Material Diffuse color and texture color) for the best
effect. Adjust the Normal setting to show waves and render an image to check.

5-21
Chapter 1- The Blender
Classic Materials Interface
& Textures
Now that we've added textures both the lighthouse and the
landscape, it is time to combine the two scenes together
using the Append command. Select the Append
command from the File pull down menu.

In Append, navigate to the folder for your lighthouse file and

select the file. You will notice you have a variety of items you
can bring over from the file. Go to the Object folder and
select the Cylinder that is your lighthouse. By bringing in
objects, you will bring in all materials and textures that are
associated with that object. You will now see your lighthouse
in your landscape scene. It will probably be too large and in
the water.

Scale and move the lighthouse to an

appropriate location on the coast.
Remember we left an area flat for this
purpose.

Render a final image of your scene and

make any other adjustments you wish. In
later chapters, we will be creating other
visual effects, and animating everything.
Remember to save your work!

** Call the instructor when

finished **

5-22
 Challenge Task- Lighthouse & Cycles
Now that we have used the classic render engine to shade your scene, try using Cycles
to texture the lighthouse and landscape. This will require some experimentation!

Save your landscape scene as Cycles Landscape. Delete all of the materials from the
meshes on this new file (this will keep your original file intact). Switch from Blender
Render to Cycles Render. Complete the following steps:

1. Replace the lamp, or lamps, with a plane and set the

material node to Emission.

2. Add shader nodes to represent all materials and

textures. Review 5-10 to 5-14 for basic Cycles material
settings. You can keep your existing materials and
check the Use Nodes button for each, but it will only
translate as a diffuse color. You will need to adjust and
add the nodes for textures again. Experiment with flat,
box, and tube mapping for an ideal look on the
lighthouse and ground. Try using a noise texture on the
water.

3. Render a picture using F12.

** Call the instructor when finished *

5-23
Chapter
Chapter 1- The Blender Interface
5 Reflection
Chapter 5 Reflection and Wrap-up:

How realistic do you want it to be?

You have just examined a long chapter on how to make your scenes
look nice using 2 different render engines. Take some time to reflect on
your experiences by answering these questions:

1. Do you need it to look perfect or do you need it today? The animation industry is
always asking this question as they complete projects. You can spend a lot of
hours designing and rendering material settings. Imagine working on a weekly TV
show with deadlines. Where can you take shortcuts? Imagine you are the
animator. Give 2 examples in a movie where you would like fine detail in a
scene and where you could get away with less detail. Explain your choices.

2. Which render engine did you like the best? Explain why you prefer this system
over the other.

3. Conduct an internet search on the topic of ray-tracing in the animation industry.

What is it exactly and why is it important to correctly map the path of a light ray?
Why does this make Cycles more accurate than the classic renderer? Explain
your answer.

5-24
 Chapter 6- Setting Up a World
Using Color, Mist and Images
Blender Internal Render Engine
Youve created a nice scene for your lighthouse, but were missing a really nice
background. Depending on which release of Blender youre running, you will either
have a black, gray or blue background. Most newer releases start with a blue or gray
background (a basic world set-up). Blender gives you some basic options in the World
settings. You can control the colors of the top and bottom (Zenith
and Horizon), fog or mist, clouds and, of course, loading JPEG
images. In order to create a new world, select the World button. If a
world has not already been placed in your scene, click the New.
This will give you a basic world with a horizon and a zenith color.
Press the F12 button to render your scene. You have some basic
options that you can set in the world buttons. Heres what you see:
Preview Window: Sample of your world settings

Mapping Options: You can flatten (Paper), Blend (Horizon/Zenith

colors), or Real Sky (gives true horizon)
Color Settings: Horizon (bottom), Zenith (top), and Ambient
(reflected light). Ambient supplies global illumination.
Ambient Occlusion: Another way to simulate ambient lighting.

Environmental Lighting: Global lighting settings.

Indirect Lighting: Used to simulate light bouncing
off objects. More accurate lighting effects.
Gather: Raytrace or Approximate. Approx. will
allow for indirect lighting effects. (discussed in the
lighting chapter)
Mist: 3D fog settings.
When setting just a straight gradient color for your world,
Select the Blend option above the color swatches and
set the Horizon and Zenith colors.

Mist Settings:
When using Mist, You will need to set both the Zenith and Horizon
colors to the color of the mist you desire (middle gray for a real
fog), turn on the Mist button, then adjust the Start (start from
camera distance) and Depth(depth of mist). You also have a
Height setting to vary
fog height (like fog at the ground level). The
Minimum Intensity slide can adjust intensity.
Depth and Intensity work together for the best
effects.
I can't see through my fog! Your
Depth setting is too low or Min.
Intensity set too high- the fog is
too thick!

6-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
6- The Blender
Setting Up aInterface
World
Creating a 3D Cloud Backgrounds:

There are several ways to create clouds, but the easiest is to use a texture in the world
settings. To set up a scene with clouds, create a world as described previously. Set the
Zenith color to blue and the Horizon to a white color (check the Blend option). Now, go
to the texture buttons and create a new texture using
Clouds (you will notice that the texture will be linking to
the world and not a material) Go down to the Mapping
panel and adjust the Size X and Y sliders (try a low X and a
higher Y) to get the effects that you want. Press F12 to
check your results. If you plan on moving the camera in
your scene, you may want to hit the Real button in the
World panel. Try a different Noise Basis like Voronoi F1 or F2
for a puffier look. Clouds can also be animated which will
be discussed in a later chapter.

Using Cloud Textures With World Mist Settings:

If you want to simulate a puffy

fog, use the cloud back-ground
settings as mentioned above, but
adjust your colors to match the
foggy environment you want.
Back in the World properties, turn
on mist and adjust the settings to
get the density for your scene. As
mentioned earlier, we will discuss
how to animated cloud settings
in a later chapter to obtain a
flowing effect.

6-2
 Chapter 6- Setting Up a World
Creating a Star Field:

Blender once had a stars world settings panel, like mist, but
decided to remove the feature for some reason. This was a great
tool and a way to set up a 3D star field quickly. Here is a simple
alternative to that setting.

To begin, go to the Textures panel, making sure to check the

world button so the texture you create is tied to the world
settings. Choose Stucci for the texture type. Also, adjust the
following:

Enable Ramp in the Colors panel. We will

be making some adjustments here shortly.

Under the Stucci panel, change from Plastic to Wall In and set
the size to .001.

Under the Influence panel, uncheck Blend

and check Horizon.

If you press F12 at this point, you should have

a heavily spotted background scene. To fix
this,go back to the color ramp and pull the
left slider to the right on the ramp until the
preview displays the star field you want.

Go back to the World settings, check both the Blend Sky and
Real Sky buttons. Adjust the Horizon and Zenith colors to match
the output you want. Press F12 to render your results.

6-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
6- The Blender
Setting Up aInterface
World
Using an Image in the Background:

If you plan to use an image in your world settings, use one

that is large and high quality. Low resolution images have a
tendency to be grainy and unrealistic. To use an image,
create a world as described before, then go to the Texture
settings. This time, select the Image or Movie type option
and select your image (described in the Materials and
Textures chapter). If you press the Both button in the
Preview window, you will notice the image does not display
(same as pressing F12).

In order to display the image, go to the Influence panel.

You will notice that Blend is already checked, but you will
need to check the Horizon, Zenith Up and Zenith Down
button. This will cause the image to influence both the
horizon and zenith world settings, taking the place of the
colors. If you press F12, you will see the image in the
rendered view, but it will be zoomed in.

To see the entire image in rendered view, go back to the

world settings and check the Paper button to flatten and fit
the image.

RoboDude Asks: How do use an image that moves

when I move the camera?
If you want to animate movement in your scene and
want the background to move as you move the
camera, these world settings won't work for you. You
will need to find a panoramic image that you can
wrap around a sphere or cylinder and scale it larger
than your scene. You can also use a large plane, like
standing in front of a billboard .

6-4
 Chapter 6- Setting Up a World
Cycles World Settings
Just like using material settings, setting up a world in Cycles is very different than setting
up a world in the internal renderer.

After selecting Cycles from the drop down renderer menu,

go to the World buttons. To set just a basic color, you can do
that without having to use nodes.

Setting Up a Simple Sky:

To set up a simple sky with horizon and zenith, enable Nodes.

The surface shader will automatically be set to Background
since you are in the world settings. By pressing the small dot
button in Color, you can change it to use a Sky Texture.

Some of the setting options include changing the type,

sun direction, and intensity through Turbidity, Ground
Albedo, and Strength.

6-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
6- The Blender
Setting Up aInterface
World
Mist in Cycles:
Like many things in Cycles, setting up a mist can be more
difficult than in the classic render engine, but can give you
more realistic results. There are many ways to create a mist,
but here is one of the more simple ways.

First, set the render engine to Cycles in the top menu bar,
then go into the Render Layers properties settings. Check
Mist under the Passes panel. This will enable the mist
settings in the World properties.

Now go to the World property setting,

use nodes to set a Background
surface and using a Sky Texture for the
color.

RoboDude Says:
The Mist options won't be
visible unless you enable
Mist in the Pass panel in the
Render Layers properties.

The Mist Pass can be set with a Start and Depth to match how
close you wish the mist to start from the camera and how deep it
projects into your scene.

Press F12 to render an image. Now that we have a basic setup, it's
time to move over to the Node Window and add the following:

Add a Viewer node

from the Add-Output
node menu. Connect to
the Render Layers panel
to render a backdrop
image.

Switch to Composting nodes. Check Use Nodes, Backdrop, and Auto Render.

6-6
 Chapter 6- Setting Up a World
Temporarily connect the Mist output
of the Render Layers panel to the
Viewer's Image port. This will allow you
to focus on the mist's settings for the
next several steps. The darker an
object is in this view, the less it is
effected by the mist.

Now it's time to add two more nodes-

A Mix node from the Color menu and
a Map Value node from Vector
menu. Connect the Mist to the Map
Value input with the Map Value
output connected to the Factor Mix
input. Connect the Render Layers
Image output to the Mix Image input.
The Mix Image output connects to both the Composite renderer and the Viewer
output. You can now adjust the color of the mist using the color swatch in the Mix node.
You can also adjust the density of the fog using the offset and size settings in the Map
Value node. You can also experiment by checking and adjusting the Use Minimum and
Maximum settings.

An internet search will turn up a dozen more ways to set up a mist, but this will give you
a good, basic result.

6-7
Chapter
Chapter 1-
6- The Blender
Setting Up aInterface
World
Using a Background Image in Cycles:

Background images can work much better in Cycles

than in the internal render engine. When using the
Rendered view port display in your 3D window, you
can view the background through the camera and
watch it move as you move the camera.

In the World properties panel, add a world, set the

surface to Background, color to Image Texture and
select an image to use. Panoramic images can work
best. For vector, set to Generated. This will give you an
initial setup that should display when rendered with
F12 or in the view port set to rendered shading. In
order to make adjustments, switch over to the Node
Editor window. Add the following nodes and
adjustments shown below:
In the Texture Add a Mapping
Coordinates node from the
node, set to Vector node
Camera, group. Adjust Adjust the
Window, or the Location, Image Texture
Object and set Rotation, and node (typically
the object to Scale for a set flat) settings.
Camera. desired look.

Set Shader Nodes

to World

6-8
 Chapter 6- Setting Up a World
Stars in Cycles:

Like everything else in Cycles, there are easier and more difficult ways to create stars.
Here is a relatively simple way to create stars. Start by making sure you are in the Cycles
renderer and add a world using nodes. Switch to the Node Editor window to add and
set the following nodes:

Noise Texture Color Ramp (from Bright/Contrast MixRGB (from Background (from
(from Texture Converter nodes)- (from Color Color nodes)- Shader nodes)-
nodes)- Basic Controls the size nodes)- Can be Colors 1 & 2 Process for the world
setting: and number of used to fine represent the output.
Scale: 300-500 stars. Set the ends adjust results. sky and star
Detail: 5-15 of the ramp like Keep changes colors. Connect
Distortion: 0.05 shown. small. to Factor.

Continue making adjustments until you get the results you desire. Pressing F12 will
probably give you better results than the view port rendering.

As people keep coming up with new and unique ways to use nodes, Blender Cycles will
continue to evolve with new features. The Blender forums and YouTube are great
resources for finding new applications and new node combinations.

6-9
Chapter 1- The
Adding an Blender Interface
Environment to Your Scene
It is now time to add a world to your lighthouse scene. Start by opening up your
Lighthouse/Landscape scene for the internal renderer. We will add a world using the
traditional render engine for this activity. Feel free to experiment with any of the
settings, but we are actually looking for a dark and stormy night, say, at late day or
dusk. I imaging it being foggy, with a billowing effect.

Since we want a fog, set the Horizon and Zenith colors to 2

slightly different shades of gray. To do this, you can click on
the color swatches and pick the gray from the menu
blocks. Press the Blend button as well if not already
set.

Turn on the Mist button and start with a Depth

setting of about 23; Intensity at 0; Start at 0; and
Height at 0. Render the image and make
adjustments as needed. Your goal is to be able
to see the lighthouse, but be a bit foggy.

You should try for something like the render below:

6-10
 Adding an Environment to Your Scene
This foggy scene looks good, but it would be nice to see some
depth. Many times, a fog can appear billowy with varying
density. For this, we will add a Cloud Texture. Go to the Texture
buttons and add a Cloud texture. Make sure World is selected by
the preview. Try different Noise Basis settings to get the look you
want.

At this point, go back to the World buttons, render an image and

make adjustments as needed. You can adjust the sizes of the
cloud texture, adjust the colors, work with the mist settings (Depth
and Intensity). You may also want to go back to the texture
settings and adjust the Noise Basis. We will animate this fog rolling
by in a later chapter.

The settings used for the render below are:

Texture Settings:
Basis: Voronoi F1- Size 0.05
Mist Settings:
Intensity 0.100; Depth 23.00

** Call the instructor when finished**

6-11
Chapter 1- The
Challenge TaskBlender Interface
& Reflection
Remember the sculpture you made in unit 3? It is now time to add an environment to
that scene to make your sculpture look like it is standing in a prominent place in nature
using Cycles. Experiment with the various Cycles world settings to get a scene you like.

Remember to switch to the

Cycles renderer at the top
of the screen, create a
Cycles emission lamp, and
set the camera in a
desirable location.
Determine if you plan to use
an image, like the example
displayed below. Add some
materials to your sculpture
as discussed in the materials
chapter. Feel free to explore
the internet for other
material and world settings
that others have tried.
** Call the instructor when finished**

Chapter 6 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Creating a World
You have experimented with the internal renderer and Cycles to create
environments for your scenes. Answer the following questions:

1. How has your view of 3D animated movies changed now that you have a basic
understanding of 3D modeling, texturing, and world settings? Specifically, what
has changed your perception of these movies? Explain.

2. Conduct some internet research. We have examined basic sky scenes in this
unit, but how would you create an underwater scene? How about a space scene
with planets or a sunset? Explore the internet to find information about one of
these and report your findings. How difficult are these scenes to create?

6-12
 Chapter 7- Lighting & Cameras
Cameras:
By default, your scene already has one camera and that is usually all you need, but on
occasion you may wish to add more cameras. You add more cameras by hitting Shift-
A, like creating all other objects discussed up until now. To change which camera is
active, you need to select that camera and press Ctrl and number pad 0. This
changes the active camera.

Like all other objects in Blender, you can adjust the camera settings as well. With the
camera selected, click on the Camera button. Here are some of the settings options
you have:

Perspective/Orthographic/Panoramic- Used to set

the camera from showing a true-life perspective view
to an orthographic view. Panoramic can give a 360
degree view in Cycles only.
Lens (Focal)- Set-up a lens length much like a real
camera. 35mm is a good, safe setting, but wide and
tight angle setting work for different needs.
Shift- Pushes the view left, right, up, down from actual
camera view, without changing perspective.
Clipping- Start and End- How close and how far an
object can get to the camera and still be seen. In
very large scenes, this needs to be set higher or things
disappear from view.
Camera- Used to set a specific make of camera for
your scene. You can select a specific camera or set
your own.
DOF- (Depth-of-field)- Used with nodes to blur
foreground and background objects. This will be
discussed in the Working with Nodes chapter.
Display Settings:
Limits- Draws a line in the scene to help you visualize
the cameras range.
Size- How big to draw the camera on the screen. You
can also control size with scale.
Show Mist- Used to give you a visual display of how
far the camera sees if using Mist (discussed in
Chapter 5).
Name- With all objects, the name of the object or
camera can be displayed on the screen, but this will
display the name in the camera view.
Passepartout- Shades the area on the screen outside
of the cameras view. You can control the darkness
of the shaded area with the Alpha slider.
Title Safe Areas- Displays a dashed box to help with placement of objects and text.

7-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
7- The Blender
Lighting Interface
& Cameras
Using Nodes for Camera Effects:
Up to this point, we have only used nodes for Cycles materials, but node can be used
with the internal renderer for camera effects as well.

Depth-of-Field- Internal Renderer:

A great node feature is creating Depth-of-Field effects. Just like a camera shot using a
low F-stop setting that creates blur behind and in front of what the camera is focused
on, we can create in Blender. This process if for the Internal Render Engine.

To start this scene, I've created a grid of

cubes. The camera is tracked to an Empty,
placed directly on the center cube.

Notice everything is in focus above. We want to blur the

foreground and background.

With the camera selected, go to the Camera's Object Data

panel to set a few things.

You have 2 ways to set the

Depth of Field. You can select
an Object for the camera to
target (great for animation) or
you can set a Distance. In order
to see the actual target point
on the screen, turn on Limits in
the Display panel. The target
point will display on the dashed
line. All of this can be
animated, much like you would
see done professionally. This will
be discussed in a later chapter.

It's now time to work on the

nodes.

In the Node Editor screen configuration, enable nodes by checking the Use Nodes
button, also set for Compositing Nodes. If you would like to render in the background,
enable Backdrop as well.

7-2
 Chapter 7- Lighting & Cameras
Delete the line connecting the Render Layers and Composite panels. We are now
going to add 2 nodes. Add a Map Value node from the Vector node set and a
Defocus node from the Filter node set. If you would like to render in the backdrop,
add a Viewer node from the Output node set.

Set the nodes up as displayed below and match settings:

The Map Value panel is used to adjust the pixels related to distance from camera
and connects to the Z on the Render Layer panel and Defocus panel. The image
Out/Ins connect as shown. Adjust the F-stop to a low number. Like a camera, a low
fStop means little is in focus beyond the target. A larger number will give a larger focus
range. Max Blur sets the amount of blurring while a high Samples setting will give you a
better quality image. Experimenting with these settings will give you different results.
Motorcycle with focus
at headlamp

7-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
7- The Blender
Lighting Interface
& Cameras
Depth-of-Field- Cycles Renderer:
Using depth-of-field is actually easier in Cycles than in the
internal renderer. You can use simple DOF in the Camera
properties panel and not even enter the Node Editor
window.

First, set the Cycles Render engine in the top bar, select the
Camera, and go to the Camera properties panel. You will
notice a few more options in the DOF panel than you have
using the internal render engine. Set the Focus target or
Distance as before, Lower the F-stop setting for blur (about
1.0), and set the Size of the Aperture Radius to about 0.2.
This should give you a good blur effect. Adjust the numbers
as needed.

Other Camera Node Effects:

These node effects work with both the internal renderer and the Cycles renderer.

To the right is a basic rendered view without any

special nodes applied. On the next page, you will
some sample node settings applied that can alter the
output:

7-4
 Chapter 7- Lighting & Cameras

Black and White output

using an RGB to BW
Convertor Node.Inverted
output using an Invert Color
Node.

Inverted output using an

Invert Color Node.

Camera lens output

using a Lens Distortion
Distort Node.

The possibilities are limitless using nodes. Search for some creative tutorials using nodes
on the web.

Using the Chroma Key (Green Screen Effect):

Blender can be used for video composite work and motion tracking (combining 3D
elements with real video), like you see in professional blockbuster films and advertising.
Motion tracking and video editing are handled in later chapters, but we will discuss
setting up nodes for chroma key composites now. Chroma key composite work
basically involves video taping a subject in front of a colored screen (typically green),
and then replace the green color with some other graphic or movie. Weather
forecasters use the chroma key feature to project weather maps behind them during
news reports.

Your first step is to film or obtain a video of the

subject in front of a green screen (or other color
not in the scene) and the image or video you
plan to put behind your subject. For this example, we are using a
video of a well known person in front a green screen and video of the Pennsylvania
capital fountain for the backdrop. For best results, the films should be the same size and
frame rate to match your output settings. Use a video converter to correct differences.

7-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
7- The Blender
Lighting Interface
& Cameras
Now, you will need to set up the nodes as shown below in the Node Editor:

Keying Settings:

While you will want to experiment with all of

these settings for the best results, start with
these recommendations.
Pre Blur- Blurs the video to match output.
Edge Kernel- Gets rid of the outer glow on
the shape.
Clip Black & Clip White- Sets the solid black
and solid whites in the image to improve
edges and washed out areas.
Key Color- Click on the color swatch to
select the color to remove from the
image. Use the eydropper to select
the green on the movie clip
preview.

You are using two Movie Clip nodes from the Input node group, a Keying node
from the Matte node group, and a Mix node from the Color node group. The Mix
output will go to a Composite node and a Viewer node. Enable the Backdrop
rendering so you can see your adjustments in the background. Connect the nodes as
shown above. The difficult part of
this set up is adjusting the Keying
settings so the green is removed,
but none of the desired image.
You may have trouble with
shadows and glow depending on
the quality of the video used.

Creating an output video will be

discussed in Chapter 24: Video
Sequence Editing.

7-6
 Chapter 7- Lighting & Cameras
Lighting Types and Settings
When you create a scene in Blender, you start with a few basic elements that will
include a camera, but may or may not include a light. Remember that what the
camera sees is what will render out as a picture or movie depending on what you tell
the program you want as a final output. To get a simple rendered view, press the F12
key. If the picture is black, you do not have a lamp or the lamp settings or placement is
incorrect. To exit the render window, press the Esc key.

In most cases, you will need more than one lamp in order to properly illuminate your
scene. Most scenes usually require 3-4 lamps. Be careful not to use too many lamps! The
different types of lamps available for you to use are as follows:

Point- Basic Blender Lamp- shines all directions.

Sun- Provides even angle of light, regardless of placement from objects.
Spot- Shines a direct angle of light.
Hemi- A wider light, much like area lights.
Area- Provides large area lighting (like a classroom). Can be scaled.

In traditional Blender rendering, only spotlights are able to cast shadows. However, with
Ray-tracing (discussed in a later chapter) all lamps can cast shadows.

Lamp Settings:

To create a lamp, position the 3D cursor in a desired location

and press Shift-A and select Lamp, then type. The lamp will
be placed on the screen. You now have several options to
select. With the lamp selected, click the Lamp button to bring
up the adjusting options. Heres what you see:
Preview Window: Sample of your lamp settings.
Lamp Type: Can be changed any time. You will get different
options depending on the lamp selected.
General Settings: This is where you select the color of the lamp, it's
energy (brightness), the distance it shines, and a few
other options.
Shadow Options: Shadow style, color and quality. Ray-shadow
will be discussed in a later chapter.
These are your basic settings. Sun and Spot give you some
different options. The Sun can actually be used to simulate sky
and atmosphere variations. The spotlight will be discussed on
the next page.

RoboDude Says: Instead of adding too many

lights, experiment with the Energy and Distance
settings first. In a large scene, the default
distance setting may not light the entire scene!

7-7
Chapter
Chapter 1-
7- The Blender
Lighting Interface
& Cameras
Spotlight Settings:

Spotlights are unique in that you can simulate a

foggy scene with them and cast shadows in the
traditional Blender program. Ray-tracing
(discussed in a later chapter) can cast shadows
for all lamp types, but because of the more
complex rendering calculations that need to be
performed, renders much slower. If you watch
professionally made animations on T.V., you will
see that ray-tracing with reflections is not always
used because of the rendering time. It is only
used when needed. You can do the same thing.
Again, we will focus on using the Buffer Shadow
settings. Ray-trace shadows will be discussed
later. Here are your spotlight settings:
Shadow Type: Buffer is the old style and fastest.
Shadow Color: Adjusts the color of the shadow.
Buffer Type: By holding your mouse over these
buttons, it will tell you the benefit of each
style (i.e. Deep supports transparency
and better filtering, but slower).
Filter and Sample: These settings can be used to
refine your results, but could add to your
render times.
Clip Start and End: Gives a range for calculating
shadows. Represented by a line down
through lamp. Keep this line as short as
possible to give the best shadowing. New
to this release is the Autoclip options to
set these for you.
Spot Shape: Set the Angle Size, Blend (edge
softness), and Shape (round or square).
You can also give it a haze with the Halo
settings and intensity.

RoboDude Asks: Why can't I see my shadows or why do they look bad? If
you have shadows, but look bad, try a larger Clip Start number to shorten up
the area of calculation or adjust the Sample Buffers Size and Samples. If you
don't see any shadows at all, you might need to go to the Render buttons and
turn on Shadows under Shading.

Different lights can be used to get different effects. As

mentioned before, try not to add too many lights to your scene.
It is better to keep it down to 3-4 and play with their locations
and setting, rather than flood the scene in light. Think of it in
terms of real lighting situations.

7-8
 Chapter 7- Lighting & Cameras
Indirect Lighting
In Cycles, you would use an emission shader to make an object emit light, but in order
to achieve this effect in the internal render engine, you will need to use indirect lighting.
Indirect light is light that bounces off other objects, like real life. There has always been
an Emit option in the Blender material settings so an object could glow, even when light
wasn't hitting it, but it could never light up things around it. It now can. First, lets set up
the material with the Emit feature on. For the scene below, I have removed all lamps
and the default World from the scene. The only reason why the cube glows in the
render is due to the Emit setting. The plane that it is resting on is not illuminated.
This is what Blender could do in older versions. In order to turn on indirect lighting, I need
to add a World back into
the scene. I set the Horizon
and Zenith colors to black
for added effect. In the
World settings, check the
box for Indirect Lighting.
Find the panel labeled
Gather and turn on
Approximate. Check and
open the panel. You will
see a Factor (influence)
slider and Bounces, which
will control how many times
the light bounces. A
rendered scene now shows
reflection on the floor plane
Emit Slider and a sphere sitting beside
the cube, invisible before
indirect lighting was
applied.

7-9
Chapter 1- The
Lighting Up Blender
Your Interface
Landscape Scene
Internal Renderer: What is a lighthouse scene without a
light shining out through the fog? Open your Lighthouse
Scene and place the 3D cursor directly in the middle of
the lighthouse where the spotlight should shine. Use your 3
principle views (#1,3,7) to place the cursor in a good
location (the light can always be moved later). After the
cursor is located, check to see if you are in the front view
(#1) and add a Spot Lamp (ShiftA-Add-Lamp-Spot).
Rotate the lamp as necessary so it is pointed across your
scene and not directly at the camera.

After the lamp is added, go to the Lamp buttons

and make sure it is set to Buffer Shadow. Adjust the
Energy to about 1.2. In the Spot Shape panel,
adjust the Size slider to about 10. This will give you a
narrow beam that is about 10 degrees wide. Also
turn on the Halo button. Render an image. Fine
tune the spot light with
Distance and Energy setting
and the Halo Intensity slider.

Your final rendering should look something like the image

below. Looks good, but something is missing. There should be
something in the middle of the lighthouse emitting that light.
Well do something simple, but effective for that next.

7-10
 Lighting Up Your Landscape Scene
Now its time to add something in the middle
KEEP THIS VERTEX AND
MOVE IT TO CENTER
of that lighthouse. Basically, were going to
add a mesh with a single vertex and place a
Halo Material on it.

Start by making sure the 3D cursor is still in the

middle of the lighthouse top. If it isnt, an easy
way to get it there is to select the spotlight
and hit Shift-S and select the option Cursor
to Selected. This is a great command to use
and use often. In the top view, add a plane.
Enter Edit Mode (tab) and delete all but one
ERASE THESE 3 VERTICES vertex. Move that remaining vertex to the
center of the lighthouse. After you move the
one vertex, exit Edit
Mode (tab).

Now go to the Materials buttons and Add a new material.

Press the Halo button. Here, you will see some Halo settings.
Adjust the Halo Size (try 1.0 or more), turn on Rings and Star,
and try adding more Rings and Stars. You may want to try
adjusting the Hardness and Add sliders.

Your end result should look something like this with a ring and
star in the center of the lighthouse. You may need to darken
your world setting a bit to get the best effect.

** Call the instructor

when finished**

7-11
Chapter 1- The
Challenge Blender
Task- CyclesInterface
Scene & Blur
Cycles Renderer: For this challenge activity, you will be adding an environment and
lamp to your lighthouse scene in Cycles, similar to the previous activity.

First, add a misty world to your scene. Refer back to pages 6-7 and 6-7 to add a mist. Try
for something like this:

Adjust the color and mist density to your desired results. Our ultimate goal is a dark and
stormy night, so we need to make some lighting adjustments and add the spotlight.

Your first step with lighting is to adjust your current overhead

lamp down for a sunset-type effect. Remember that the
Cycles lamp setting in under the Materials panel as an
emission shader. You will also want to go back to the World
properties panel and turn down the Strength of the sky
texture for a darker appearance.

Select the lamp and set the

strength in the Materials
panel. Render and adjust until
you have the desired effects.

7-12
 Challenge Task- Cycles Scene & Blur
It's now time to add the spotlight. There is no easy way to simulate the halo from the
cone in Cycles at the time of this writing, but there are several ways to simulate the
effect. Here is the easiest method found online:

We will simulate the spotlight

with a mesh Cone. Create a
cone from the Add-Mesh
menu, enter Edit mode, and
shape the cone to look like the
spotlight used in the previous
pages.

Add the following material nodes to the

cone as shown to the right. You will need
to adjust the Emission Strength to get a
desired effect. The Volume Scatter node
creates a mist effect within the cone.

You will also need to add an object, like a

sphere or cylinder to simulate the lamp in the
lighthouse. Use an Emission shader on this.

You should now have a result similar to the one shown below:

** Call the instructor when finished**

7-13
Chapter
Chapter 1- The Blender Interface
7 Reflection
Chapter 7 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Lights, Camera, Not Quite Action!

This chapter's focus was on setting up lights and cameras in your scene.
The action part is coming up soon when we discuss animation
techniques. Take some time to reflect on your experiences by
answering these questions:

1. Look back at the camera settings found on page 7-1. Many of the features that
can be done with real cameras can be simulated using these settings in a virtual
world. What happens to a scene when you decrease the focal length? Research
the internet to find out where shorter lens lengths can be useful (called a wide-
angle lens). Explain your results.

2. Another feature of real cameras is aperture and is represented by the F-stop

number. Research how the aperture works on a camera and why it is useful.
Explain your results.

3. Explain a situation where it would be useful to use depth-of-field where the

foreground and background will be out of focus.

4. After completing this chapter, what was your greatest challenge and learning
experience and why? Explain.

7-14
 Chapter 8- Render Settings
Basic Setup Options
The render window is where you set up the output for your scene. Do you want a
JPEG picture image or a movie? What size do you want the output to be? Do
you want a high quality output or a draft style format? Do you want shadows or
Ray-tracing effects? How about Motion Blur? If youre doing a movie, how many
frames-per-second do you want the movie to run? Last, but not least, where do
you want to save the file? All of these issues are addressed in the Render
Settings. Obviously, the higher the quality of the output, the slower it will render
and the larger the file size will be when finished. For a review of rendering and
animation basic, refer back to pages vii and viii in the manual. Blender has
organized these options into 3 tabs- Render,Render Layers and Scene.
Click on the Render button to get started.

The Rendering Interface and Settings:

There are many options needing addressed in order
to save your work as an image or movie. Some of
these feature will be discussed in more detail in later
chapters. For now, we are just interested in saving
basic images in PNG format and movies as MP4s.
Image/Animation Buttons: Pressing F12 is the same as hitting
the Render button. To make a movie, hit Animation.
Display: Determine if your render occurs in a viewport or in a
new window.
Dimensions: This is where you set the size, frame range,
scaling and frame rate of your rendering. If you make an
animation and it runs too fast or slow, you can change the
mapping and scale the time with Time Remapping. Think of
it like scaling time. Presets can also be selected.
Anti-Aliasing: Samples with smooth the edges of objects.
Default is 8.
Motion Blur: Used to show blur from fast movement.
Shading: This is where you set what features you want
rendered. Turning off what you don't need speeds renders.
Performance: Settings for render performance.
Post Processing: If doing composites or sequences
(discussed later) are controlled here.
Metadata: Labeling for frames and movies if needed.
Output: Set file types for outputs and saving locations. You
can also set compression quality for images. It's always a
good idea to type the file extensions when naming output
files. For movies, there will be encoding options in a panel.
Encoding: Settings for movie and audio file types for your
output.
Bake: Baking certain processes to speed rendering.

8-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
8- The Blender
Render Interface
Settings
Render Layer Settings:

The Render Layer settings have been recently moved to

their own panel. Objects can be assigned to different
layers, making it easy to turn objects on and off,
depending on what you wish to render, and work in
conjunction with your layer
settings that are displayed in the
bottom of the 3D window.
Scene: These are the layers that you currently have set to be
visible (matches the active layers displayed at the bottom of
the 3D View window).
Layer: Layers that will render (F12 key). Objects can be in
multiple layers in the scene and be set visible, but possibly
not visible when rendered. All layers are checked by default.

Include: These are all the other features set to render.

Mask Layer: Objects in a mask layer will not render and

actually mask objects behind them. This is a useful feature
when doing video tracking projects where you combine real
video with 3D modeled elements, discussed in a later
chapter. In the example below, the front cube is in layer 1
and set to mask while the back cube is in layer 2, set to
render normally. Notice the results when rendered.

Passes: Set to Combine

by default to render
everything, you can set
individual features to
render or not render.

Remember that objects

can be moved to different
layers by pressing M

8-2
 Chapter 8- Render Settings
Scene Settings:
This is where you set up some of the global variables for
your entire scene. Many of these options can be set in
other places.

Scene: Sets the active camera and any scene that you
may want to use as a background. Defaults are typically
used.

Units: Sets the units that you use to construct your scene. By
default, you are using the Blender unit, which basically
matches a millimeter. There are a variety of basic
measurement systems available.

Keying Sets: These are used to record multiple properties at

the same time. Typically not set.

Color Management: The color configuration system you

want to use. Set to RGB by default.
Audio: Global Audio settings for the program.
Gravity: Sets the global gravity of your scene. Gravity is also
controlled in other areas of the program that will be
discussed in later chapters.

Rigid Body World: These features will be discussed in the

real-time and physics chapters.

Simplify: These features are used to limit the quality of

various features so your scene does not become to
complex accidentally. Typically these features are turned
off.

Basic Output Settings:

So now that we have looked at the basic settings of your scene, you now have to
decide what your final output will be. Are you rendering an image or a movie? Are you
rendering for a standard movie setting like DVD or HD quality? Will it be used as a web
page header or button? A sprite for a game or a full page advertisement? You have a
lot of options and considerations to consider when deciding what your output settings
should be. Refer to the Rendering and Animation Basics in the book introduction.

The next page will show you the settings that we use in our lab for quality and speed.

8-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
8- The Blender
Render Interface
Settings
Rendering Movies and Images
In chapter 10, you will be creating your first computer animation. After you create all of
you objects, apply materials and textures, and create your animations, you will be
ready to make a movie file of your scene. In past years, we rendered at DVD quality
(720 pixels x 480 pixels) at 30 frames-per-second (FPS). We have now switch to HD
quality settings (1280 pixels x 720 pixels), 30 FPS with minimal increase in rendering times.
You will need to determine your own needs, but these work well. Here are the steps to
saving that movie file:

Seven Easy Steps to Create an MPEG Movie File:

Preset Dimensions: Set this to your desired results. We use

HDTV 720p (1280 x 720). Double check the X,Y
dimensions and 100% size for final results. For faster test
renders, set the percentage lower.
Frame Range and Rate: Set the frame range to match
your animation length. Set the Frame Rate to the
frames-per-second to match your project. US standards
are 30 fps or 29.97. Time Remapping can be used to
speed or slow your animation.
Anti-Aliasing: Should be checked and set to 8 for quality
renders.
Additional Features: Check these features to match your
project. Motion Blur will add interesting blur effects
related to the speed of an object like a propeller.
Shading, Performance, Metadata, and Post Processing
default settings are typically all you would need.
Output: Click the file folder to name your file and
determine your saving location. Remember to add the
extension after the name. In our case, we add .mp4 to
the end of the file name. This is where you will also set
the output file type. Ours is MPEG.
Encoding: Set the Format and Codec (file compression)
to MPEG-4 for both of these for our settings. You will also
want to set the Audio Codec if you have audio in your
file output. We typically use MP3.
Render: Now that everything is set, go back up to the
top the the panel and select Animation. The movie
should start to render. It is now time to wait until the
movie is finished!
In order to watch your
final movie, press Ctrl-F11
in Blender, or exit Blender
and find the file in your
drive to watch using any
movie player.

8-4
 Chapter 8- Render Settings
Rendering a PNG or JPEG (.jpg) Image

In order to render a simple PNG or JPEG image, set up all of the options previously
discussed. By default, Blender will render a PNG image without changing any of the
output settings from MP4. It is important that the file type is set to JPEG in the Render
Output panel if you want a JPEG. Since PNG files can handle transparency and
animation, I recommend saving images in PNG format. Press the F12 button or
Render button to bring up the render window. After your image is rendered, Press
F3. This will open the file save window. Here is where you give your file a name and set
the location. Remember to type .png or .jpg after the name of the file so it saves
properly. Windows will not know what to do with the file if the .png or .jpg extension is
missing and Blender may not put it on for you.

Network Rendering
Network rendering (also called a Render Farm) occurs when you use multiple
computers to render out your single image or animation. While there are several 3 rd
party rendering systems our there, Blender has a nice built in network render engine. To
enable the network rendering feature, go to the File drop down menu and select User
Preferences to enable the Render:Network Renderer Add-On. Refer to page 1-3 for a
refresher on the User Preferences options. Render farms also allow for multiple projects.

A network renderer works by using several computer that are on the same network to
operate together to render your project. There is typically a main computer that houses
your project file and servers out parts of the
image or animation frames to the other
computers. When those computers are finished
with their frames, they are sent back to the
master computer where more frames are sent
back out to the slave computers until the project
is finished. Any computer can be used as a slave
computer, as long as it has a network connection
and enough processing power to be able to
render frames.

Setting up the Render Farm:

After you have enabled network rendering in the User
Preferences, go to the top bar in Blender and switch to
Network Rendering in the same drop down where you
select the internal renderer or Cycles. You will need to
do this for every computer you plan to use for rendering
the project (client, master, and slaves).

RoboDude Says: I have a lot of computers in my network to manage!

There are many ways to manage your render farm from using a shared
keyboard/mouse/monitor to remote desktop access. Access the internet
and YouTube for advice to see what may work best for you.

8-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
8- The Blender
Render Interface
Settings
After you have switched to the Network Renderer, You will need to set up every
computer in the network before you add your first project. There are 3 parts to the
renderer:

Client- This is the machine that has the actual Blender project on it and where
the results will most likely be sent back to when finished.
Master- This is the machine that controls the entire process from taking files from
the client and farming out frames to the slave computers. The master also
manages all projects from all clients and controls the workflow. You can also set
priority to projects.
Slave- These are the computers that are the workhorses. The master serves out
frames to the slave machines. When the frames are finished, they send them
back to the master machine that sends out more frames to be rendered.

A computer can actually be all 3 parts, but work flow and efficiency will be reduced if
the client and master machine must also render frames as a slave. In my small
classroom render farm, we use one computer as the client and master machine with
several other computers acting as the slave machines.

Master machine setup- The master must be set up before all

other machines as all other machines look to the master.
Under Network Settings in the Render properties, select
Master and Start Service. You will also want to set the
Path where the temporary render files will be save as they are
communicated back and forth between computers.

You can set the actual IP Address of the machine or leave it

as default as we do. The only benefit of setting an address
would be when there are more than one master server on a
network and you would need to know which one to send a
project to. Keep Broadcast checked. The master is now
ready to send and receive projects.

Slave Machine Setup- Now go to a machine that will be a Slave.

In the Render properties, select Slave and then refresh the IP
Address. After doing this, the IP address of the master machine
should display in the address box. You may also want to set the
location and folder of the temporary files. Leave all of the
checked default settings as shown.

After everything is set, select Start Service. You are now ready
to start accepting projects. Set up all slave machines the same
way. The next page is designed to use as a quick reference
handout for setting up a project to network render.

8-6
 Chapter 8- Render Settings
Setting Up a Client for Network Rendering
1. Prepare your file. Before taking your file to the render farm, did you:
Check the render file settings? (follow the steps for animating a movie-
frame range; HDTV 720p; MPEG 4 encoding; shading settings; mp4 movie)
Pack external data? (File menu-External Data-Pack into .blend file)
2. Save Blender file. Save to the appropriate shared drive folder that can be
accessed by the client Blender program. Also, copy any physics folders used.
3. Launch your file. Open your file on the client machine in a fresh Blender
program. If this machine is also serving as the master machine, make sure you do
not close the Blender program running as master.
4. Set the output file. Just as you do for any movie output, make
sure you are saving your final movie to an appropriate folder,
with the extension added. (typically.mp4)
5. Go to File menu and Save your file. The render farm uses your last
saved file.
6. Switch from Blender Render to Network Render in the top menu
bar.
7. Make the following adjustments, then press Animation on Network.
Client node- This is what sends your project to the master,
then out to the slaves.

Server Address- Press the refresh button to bring up the

master server address. Should display an actual number.

Chunks- Set to 5- This setting determines how many frames

are sent to each slave at a time. (5 should be the default
setting)
Animation on network- This button sends your job out to the
network.
8. Minimize Blender and Wait (don't close). You can watch your
progress in the browser window if the master monitor has
already been launched with other projects. If not, you can
press Open Master Monitor in the render buttons to launch
the monitor. All jobs are displayed and their progress with a
few setting options. When the file is finished, you can exit your
file and copy the
movie back to
your folder and
delete all files
and folders you
created in the
temporary render
farm folder folder.

8-7
Chapter
Saving a1- The Blender
Picture Interface
& Chapter 8 Reflection
Open your Landscape file and set up a good view for rendering to a PNG file. Set your
render options for the following:
1. Dimension Presets- HDTV 720p (1280 x 720 pixels)
2. Turn on Anti-Aliasing- set to 8 (set by default, but
check)
3. Select file output- Set as PNG, set compression
quality to 100%. It is not necessary to name an
output file for this activity.
4. Name your file: Landscape Image.jpg

Double check all other settings as per

the chapter descriptions, render
image (F12) and save the image (F3).
Dont forget to add .png to the end
of the file name! We will soon be
using the animation setting so begin
to become familiar with those
adjustments. We will be using them
within the next few exercises. Try
setting your image as a desktop
background!
** Call the instructor when finished**

Chapter 8 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Render Times & Quality

It takes Hollywood a long time to make a 3D animated movie, even
with high quality equipment. Take some time to reflect on the following:

1. Think about the amount of time it takes to render a single picture. This lighthouse
scene is simple compared to most professional productions. Try rendering your
picture at presets TV NTSC 4:3 (DVD quality); HDTV 720p; and HDTV 1080p. Record
your render times. What did you discover? How do you think these times would
effect making a feature film? Explain.

2. Research the internet. How long does it take to typically make a feature film?
How many people work on a project? Explain your findings.

8-8
 Chapter 9- Ray-Tracing
Ray-tracing is used to produce mirrored and reflective surfaces. It is also being used to
create transparency and refraction (bending of images through transparent surfaces-
like a magnifying glass or a lens). With ray-tracing, all Blender lights can cast shadows if
you desire. Ray tracing can produce some stunning effect, but can come at a high
cost in rendering times. Use it only where needed. Dont try to ray-trace everything. The
professionals dont even do that. Watch any 3D show on T.V. and you will see it being
used selectively. You can get some great shadow and texture effects with Blenders
traditional spotlights and material settings at a fraction of the render times.

The ray-tracing features we talk about in this chapter are for the
Internal Render Engine. Because of the nature of Cycles
rendering, ray-tracing is controlled by the shaders we have
already talked about. To get ray-tracing to work, you need to go
to the Render settings and turn on Ray Tracing in the Shading
panel (should already be checked by default). Now you are
ready to apply some of the ray-tracing features to your objects.
Until you do that you wont see any difference in your renders.

Lighting and Shadows

To get a ray shadow for a lamp, select the lamp you want to cast
shadows (all types work with ray-tracing), go to the Lamp
settings, find the Ray Shadow button and activate it.

When you activate ray shadow, you will see a few setting for
most of the lamp types. You will see Soft Size settings for edge
softness and Samples for improved quality.

You will also see two options called

Adaptive QMC and Constant QMC.
These are just ways to generate the
shadows with Adaptive being quicker
while Constant can give better quality, but
slower renders.

You will notice a few extra setting options for a ray spotlight.
Spotlight Size, Spotlight Blend, and Halo Intensity work the same
as they do for a buffer shadow spotlight.

Notice the shadows above. The left image was rendered with Samples at 1 and Soft at 0.
The right image was 10 and 1.

9-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
9- The Blender Interface
Ray-Tracing
Reflection (mirror) and Refraction (transparency)
To create a mirror, or reflective surface on an object, select that object and add a
material. You can also add textures to an object and have a mirror surface. In the
Material buttons, you will find a panel called Mirror. All of the ray-mirror features are
found in that panel. Check the Mirror button and experiment with the reflection
settings. The Reflect slider controls the amount of mirror. A full slider would be a perfect
mirror.

For Transparency, press the Transparency button to activate it, select Raytrace. Two
main adjustments are IOR (Index of Refraction) is used to create the Lens effect and
bends light. Fresnel is used to control the amount of transparency. There are some other
setting that you may feel free to experiment with, but these are the main settings.

Fresnel: Controls the amount

Alpha: This transparency of Ray Trasparency.
setting can also be used with
Ray Transparent.
Filter/Falloff/Limit: These settings
IOR: (Index of Refraction) control additional effect with
Controls the amount of how light passes through an
distortion. object.
Depth: If you cannot see
through the object properly,
Depth needs to be set higher.

Reflect: Controls the amount Fresnel: In mirror, this causes a

of mirror. Full reflect will give fogging effect on the surface.
you the effect of a real mirror
or chrome.
Gloss: These settings control
Distance and Fade: Controls
additional effects to the
how much is actually
mirror.
reflected and what it should
fade to when it reaches that
maximum distance. 0 means
no limit.

The image to the left uses a small

amount of ray mirror on the floor and
a high ray mirror reflection on the
back monkey head to simulate
chrome. The front monkey head and
sphere are using a high fresnel and
IOR setting to simulate glass and
distortion.

9-2
 Reflection & Refraction Practice
Since we dont have many objects that would work
well with mirror/transparency in our lighthouse scene
(except the water, which would create a slow
rendering), we will create a new scene for our ray-
tracing exercise. Since we have experience using the
Extrude command from our lighthouse modeling, lets
use it to make a drinking glass. Start a new scene and
erase the Cube. Next, add a Circle mesh in the Top
view and check the Fill option in the Tool Shelf.

Now switch to a Front view, switch to Edit

mode and Wireframe shading. Begin
Extruding (E key) to shape a simple
drinking glass. As you extrude upward,
scale the top out a bit to show taper.
When you reach the top, extrude back
down inside the glass to show wall
thickness. When you finish, go back to
Object mode, Solid shading, and hit
Smooth in the Tool Shelf.

It's now time to add a Plane for the glass to rest

on. For fun, let's also add a monkey head to
the scene. Set the monkey head Smooth from
the Tool Shelf, then go to the Modifiers panel
and add a Subdivision Surface modifier to
shape up the monkey. Sub-Surf adds
imaginary rows of verticies to an object in
order to improve image quality. Adjust your
lights and camera angle to get a scene
something like the one shown below:

Now that we have our

basic scene, it's time to
add materials and texture
to our objects. Add an
appropriate texture to the
floor of your choice and
give it a small amount of
Ray Mirror as discussed on
the previous pages. Also,
add a material to the
monkey head and take
Ray Mirror up to simulate
chrome.

9-3
Chapter 1- &The
Reflection Blender Interface
Refraction Practice
You should now have
a scene that looks
something like this.
You may notice the
tile floor I used looks
like it has depth to it.
In the Texture settings,
I applied a Normal
map to it, like we did
with the water in our
lighthouse scene. If
you need help, refer
back to the chapter
on materials and
textures.

It's now time to place a material on the glass. For the glass, you
will want to apply Ray Transparency (fresnel) and a small amount
of IOR for refraction. When you render the scene, you will
probably notice that you can't see through the entire glass and
will look dark. Take the Depth setting up to 5 in the Transparency
panel. This will correct the problem. You may also want to apply a
Stucci texture to the glass to show waviness. Try taking the Size
down to 0.15 and add some Normal as well. You will need to get
rid of the pink color. Try setting it to white. Experiment with your
setting until you are pleased with the results.

When finished, render your results and save it as a JPEG image.

** Call the instructor when finished**

9-4
 Challenge Task- Cycles R & R
Now that you have the basics of reflection and refraction in the Blender internal render
engine, it's time to recreate the scene you just made using Cycles for comparison.
Remember, the purpose for using Cycles in a scene is to recreate realistic effects.

Your goal is to recreate the previous scene at the highest quality settings possible in the
time you have to work and the quality of your machine. Look back at Chapter 4 as a
refresher on tweaking your render settings in Cycles. Also, look back at Chapter 5 for
material and texture settings for Cycles. Feel free to adjust the world settings as well.

** Call the instructor when finished**

9-5
Chapter
Chapter 1- The Blender Interface
9 Reflection
Chapter 9 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Creating Realistic Material Effects

Professionals spend a lot of time studying the look of objects when
trying to re-create them in the digital world. Take some time to reflect
on your experiences by answering these questions:

1. Look at the objects around you. Where do you see reflection? You will probably
find that many things reflect to some degree- more than you ever noticed
before. What have you noticed? Explain.

2. As you experimented with reflection in Blender, what happened to an object

when reflection was taken up in regards to the object's diffuse color? Did the
object lose color? Why did this happen? Explain.

3. A chrome car bumper is highly reflective. Chrome can be difficult to simulate in

3D models. Besides reflection, what do you see in chrome? Is it a perfect mirror
(100% reflection) or is there something else? Explain.

4. Look at some real-world objects that are transparent (windows, clear ball-point
pen, paperclip holder, drinking glass, optical glasses, magnifying glass, marble,
etc.). Where do you find refraction? How does the amount of refraction relate to
the curvature of the object? Explain.

9-6
 Chapter 10- Animation Basics
Basic Key-framing and Auto Key-framing
Now that we know how to make stuff and make it look good, its time to figure out how
to move it around in your scene. If you're familiar with older versions of Blender, this is a
HUGE change from the past! What used to be called the Action Editor and IPO
(Interpolation) windows are now called the Dope Sheet and Graph Editor windows.
Basically, The Dope Sheet shows your animation keys as points that can be easily
copied or moved on a line. The Graph Editor shows your animations as graph curves,
where different things can be done with them. This is a big area with lots of things we
can do and talk about. Many of the features available will become understandable
with practice and by getting beyond the basics. This is a highly developed area in
Blender where new features will more than likely be available before this document
can ever be printed. For this reason, we will deal with the basics. The first thing we need
to do is go back and re-read the section on Rendering and Animation Basics (pages vi
- viii). Selecting a preset format will
set your frame rate correctly.

After you set up your scene and set the Frames/Second (FPS) in the
render button area, consider what you want your actors to do
and how long they should take to do it. One of the problems that
beginner animators experience is making the motions occur in an
appropriate time. Remember to look at your frames/second (FPS)
when animating and relate it to time. For example, if you want
something to take 3 seconds to get from point A to pointB and
you are running at 25 fps, you need to complete the animation in a
total of 75 frames.

Moving Through Time:

In the picture below, you will find some controls at the bottom
of the screen in the Timeline window. If the Timeline window
isn't visible by default, you can select the Default or
Animation screen in the top toolbar. There are several other
ready-made screen layouts that we'll discuss in later chapters.
Timeline Current frame: Playback Controls: Synchronization:
window This is your current frame. Can be controlled with Just like any player, Used to match
type the Arrow Keys- Left/Right will change one frame moves through playback- sound
at a time. You can also drag this line with mouse. time. & video.

Current Frame

Alternate Playback: Start and End Frames: Key-framing:

If this is selected, you can set the play- Sets the movie length, unless the Control for
back start and end frames here Alternate Playback button is press. inserting/removing key
different then the actual scene frames. The it will just display working frames. frames/types.

10-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
10-The Blender Interface
Animation Basics
Moving, Rotating and Scaling:

These are the 3 basic modifiers to use on an object in

animation. When you create key-frames in Blender with
these modifiers, Blender will figure out all the in between
locations on the other frames. To insert a key on an
object, go to the frame where you wish to place the key,
move, rotate or scale the object, then press the I key
to Insert Key. Make sure your cursor is in the 3D window
when you push the I key. The menu to the right pops
up. You have 3 main options for now- Location, Rotation
and Scaling and combinations of these. Select the key
option of what youve done to the object. Now,
advance to the next frame where you want to put a key (i.e. frame 25 if you want a
movement to occur after 1 second), move, rotate or size the object, then press I to
insert another key. Remember, you can change frames quickly with the arrow keys.

Continue placing keys along your timeline to create your animation. For the most part,
location and size keys work flawlessly, but care needs to be given to rotation keys. If you
try to rotate an object too far in one set of keys, the object may not rotate in the exact
direction you want it to. It may rotate oddly. Try small angular steps while animating
rotation keys. There are ways to control this better and tools to simplify this process that
will be discussed later.
RoboDude Says:
If an object doesnt seem like it rotates properly with
animation keys, try pressing Ctrl-A to reset the objects
Automatic Key-Framing: scale and rotation.

Typing I to insert keys is the traditional way of entering key frames, but it can become
annoying when you have a lot of items to insert key frames for (for example, bones in a
skeleton). This is where automatic key framing becomes a useful feature. To turn on
automatic key framing, press the small red circle button in the playback buttons on the
time line window and select the type of keys to record. This will record any motion you
do on a given frame and insert the
necessary key frames needed.
Don't forget to set a key on your
initial frame. Auto key framing
won't do that unless you change
something on that frame.

Key Frames: Auto Key Frame Button: Auto Key Types: Delete Key Button:
At any frame where you Eliminates the need to Select the type of keys you Press this button to
insert a key, a yellow line press I to insert keys. want to automatically record. delete a key at
will display in the timeline. By setting this, even pressing I that frame.
will automatically add them.

RoboDude Says:
Don't forget to turn off automatic key framing when not needed! You may end up animating
things accidentally when you don't want to!

10-2
 Chapter 10- Animation Basics
Viewing Your Animation:

There is a simple way to view your animation without having to render out a movie.
Take the current frame number to the place where you want to start viewing the
animation. Place your cursor in the 3D window you wish to view your animation and
press the Alt and A keys together. The animation will play. Blender will attempt to
display the movie at the correct frames-per-second, but may be unable to do so due
to scene complexity, computer speed, or image settings (solid or wireframe -Z key).

You can also see your animation by pressing the play button in
the Timeline window. You can also play backwards.

Movement may not be exactly how you planned it. Blender automatically defaults to
trying to create a smooth flow through the keys youve place. This can be changed
and will be discussed later.

Working with the Graph Editor and Dope Sheet

Animation is difficult to do without some basic knowledge of
the Graph Editor and Dope Sheet. As mentioned earlier,
these used to be called the IPO (interpolation) and Action
Editor windows. The best way to access these windows is to
change your screen layout from Default to Animation.
You will see the 2 windows on the left and it may help to
make those windows larger. All objects that have animation
keys on them will be
displayed in the windows and their data displayed
to the right as diamonds (Dope Sheet) and curves
(Graph Editor). You can zoom in/out and pan in this
window with the center mouse wheel. Like actual
objects, the curves can be edited in an edit and
Dope Sheet object mode. Older versions of Blender would only
Window show you the curves of a selected object, but 2.6
can display all objects in the scene. At first glance,
it can be rather confusing! To simplify your view,
you can check/uncheck objects to hide/show their
curves. By opening a triangle under an object, you
can select
individual
curves for
that object
and edit
Graph Editor them.
Window

10-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
10-The Blender Interface
Animation Basics
More About the Dope Sheet:

The Dope Sheet shows your

animation keys as small
diamonds along the time line.
This can be very useful when you
want to copy keys to other points
along the time line or select
multiple keys and scale them to
slow down an animation. You
can select keys the same way
you select other objects in
Blender- by using the RMB while holding Shift; the B key to box select, or just RMB a
single key. You will notice that when you select a key in the Dope Sheet, the same key is
selected in the Graph Editor. You will see many of the same options that are available
in the Graph Editor, discussed below.

More About the Graph Editor:

In older versions of Blender, you could animate many things, but not everything. The
newer versions boast that everything can be animated and so far from what I've seen,
this appears to be true. Everything can also be displayed in the Graph Editor, but trying
to look at everything at one time is confusing. Below is a short description on how to
control the Graph Editor window:

Menus for viewing Filters- By pressing the

and options for Filters button, you can Proportional
curves and keys. chose which keys to look editing for curves.
at to avoid confusion. Creates a
Isolate the window (i.e. transforms, materials, Snapping, pivot background image
to just viewing of textures, world, etc.) and copy/paste of a curve- useful
selected object commands. when working on
(very useful). an objects and
need to see the
curves for another
RoboDude Says: object.
The Graph Editor and Dope Sheet views can be confusing! With
practice, it becomes easier to view and maneuver in them.

10-4
 Chapter 10- Animation Basics
As mentioned before, when you create an animation for an object, Blender
automatically tries to smooth the path of animation through your key points. You
have ways of controlling the results of the path. One way is to click on the path(s) you
want to modify in the Graph Editor window and, with the cursor in the Editor window,
type T for type. You can also access these Interpolation Modes by going to the
Key menu and select Interpolation Mode. You have 3 main options (and others):

Constant- Gives a square waveform, like turning it on and off. No smooth flow.
Linear- Takes a straight path from point A to point B. Solves problems of
animations swinging way out of where you want it to go, but jerky motion
at key points
Bezier- The default type which tries to make the motion through the points
smooth.
There are other smoothing options available in interpolation mode to experiment with
that can change the shape of the curve and effect.

Animation path of a cube with 3 keys placed at Animation path of a cube with 3 keys placed at
shown locations with Bezier path type selected. shown locations with Linear path type selected.
Path is smooth, but curves way out. Path is straight, but jerky at key points.

There is another way to keep the bezier type, but control the flow.
It requires you to go into the track in edit mode (unlocked) and
adjust verticies on the graph individually. First, select the track you
wish to modify (Loc, Rot, Size- X, Y, or Z) and make sure the track is
unlocked (Tab key). When you do that, each key will be displayed
as 3 points. By grabbing (G key) an end of the 3-point spline,
you can move and size it to get a different flow through that
point. This technique requires some skill and practice. Key points
can also be moved to different locations using this method
(change a key from one frame to another.)

10-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
10-The Blender Interface
Animation Basics
RoboDude Asks: I messed up my animation. How do I start over?
If you ever need to start over with an animation, you can erase all the animation tracks in
the Graph Editor window and start over. To select all tracks, hit theA key once or twice,
then the Delete key. Be careful that you only have the keys for the selected object!

Modifying Curves in the Graph Editor:

What else can you do in the Graph Editor? There are some simple features that will
allow you to set a constant motion or rotation, mirror a curve, apply noise, and set
something to cycle through an animation like walking. These are all features that, with a
little practice, will save you a lot of work.

Let's first look at an example of making something spin at a constant speed. You first
need to set 2 key frames at frame 1 and
something like frame 30. Rotate the
object 90 degrees between the 2 keys. If
you are running at 30 frames-per-
second, this would give you a full
revolution in 4 seconds, but right now,
your animation would stop after 1
second and only spin 90 degrees. In the
Graph Editor window, find the rotation
track that shows the rotation curve and
select it. In my case, it is the Z Rotation
curve. By going into the Channel menu and selecting
Extrapolation Mode you can choose Linear Extrapolation. The
curve will extend infinitely. To change the speed, move the key on
frame 30. To stop it from spinning at a later frame, move to that
frame (say, frame 100) and hit I to insert a key-frame on the graph.
You can now go back into the Extrapolation Mode menu and
choose Constant Extrapolation. The curve will level out after that
frame.
Under the Key menu, you will find some other useful tools to
shape your animations. There is a useful Mirror option that can
flip a curve. This would be useful for objects such as gears and
wheels where you need to match the animation of an object,
but need to turn in the opposite
direction. You will also see a new
option in the Key menu called
Add F-Curve Modifier. The classic
Cycles option can be found
there (useful for repetitive motion
like swinging) along with other
useful modifies such as Noise
which will give a jitter effect to
something's motion.

10-6
 Chapter 10- Animation Basics
The previous section dealt with basic object animation. Deforming meshes, following
paths, creating bone structures (armatures) and creating child-parent relationships will
be discussed later. Animation can be a frustrating thing to perfect. Practice!

Animating Materials, Lamps and World Settings (and more)

Earlier we mentioned that everything can be animated in Blender and those animation
tracks can be viewed in the Graph Editor. If you can change a number or a color in a
box, it can be animated- even in Cycles! Let's spend some time looking at some of
these things. The process below works in the Node Editor window as well.
For my example, I'm changing the material
settings on a cube. At frame 1, I'm setting a
key frame on the Diffuse Color and Intensity
and Specular Hardness. In order to put a key
frame on any data block, simply place your
cursor over the block and hit I. You will
notice the block will turn yellow, indicating
that a key frame is present on that setting at
that frame number. The block will remain
green for all other frames, indicating that the
setting is animated. This will even work for
Above: No Material Keys. check mark boxes.
Top Right: Keys applied
to Diffuse Color and
To see the animated effects, you will need to
Intensity and Specular place your cursor in the buttons window and
Hardness. Key frames press Alt-A. The numbers will scroll showing
displayed in yellow. the setting has been animated. You may not
Right: Animated features be able to see the final effects until a movie
are displayed in green is rendered out. This process will work for any
on non- key frames. window setting.

Notice the Graph Editor to the right. You

can open the Material graphs for the cube
and see all the settings you applied,
provided you have set the buttons at the
bottom of the window to display material
keys. These keys can be edited the same
way discussed on the previous pages.

These techniques are useful for animating items such as changing spot lamp size,
intensity and color, rolling fog and clouds in the World settings, and waves in the Texture
settings.

RoboDude Says:
Remember that you can always undo a bad animation key by using Ctrl-Z !

10-7
Chapter 1- The Blender
Adding Motion Interface
to Your Scene
Open your Landscape Scene file and go to your scene buttons.
Its time to animate our dark and stormy night. We will start by
making the correct setting to do a movie. First, review the 7 Easy
Steps to Create an MPEG Movie found on page 8-4. Follow those
steps and name the output movie file as Stormy Night.mp4. Also
set the End frame to 200. Our movie will be 200 frames long, or 6.6
seconds at 30 fps. You will also want to make sure Ray Tracing is
turned OFF. Ray Tracing will slow down your renders and is not
necessary for this scene. Change your screen layout from Default
to Animation. Remember, this is found at the top of your screen.

The first thing we plan to

animate is the camera. We
will do a short, simple
movement of the camera
coming closer to the shore.
In the top view, select the
Camera. Make sure the
camera is at a good
location and does
not render any edges
of your planes. At
frame 1, hit I to
insert a Location key.
Now use your arrow
keys to move to frame 200. Move the
camera closer to shore, hit I to insert
another location key.

The motion doesnt need to be much. We dont want the boat moving too fast! Go
back to frame 1 and hit Alt-A to see your animation. You should see the camera
animated. Press Esc to stop playing the animation. Save your file.

Now were going to animate the spotlight rotating in

the lighthouse. In the top view, select the spotlight. At
frame 1, press I to insert a Rot (rotation) key. It
doesnt matter at what angle the spotlight is starting
at in the animation.

10-8
 Adding Motion to Your Scene
Go to frame 30 (one second) and rotate the
spotlight 45 degrees. To do this, type R to rotate,
then type 45 on the keyboard. Press Enter or LMB
click. The lamp will have rotated exactly 45 degrees.
If you want the lamp to spin the opposite direction,
type - after the 45. Press I to insert another
Rotation key. Use your left arrow key to go back to
frame 1. You should see the lamp spin back to its
original position. Switch to the Animation screen.

In order to keep the lamp spinning

consistently the entire animation, Curve showing
we could attempt to continue rotation change
along the time line, inserting keys over 30 frames.
every 45 degrees and 30 frames,
but that would get boring very fast.
Instead, we will use an Extend
mode in the Curve Editor window.
Isolate view to
Enlarge the Curve Editor window selected object
Turn off these tracks
large enough to work with and turn
off the animation tracks for the
camera to simplify your view. You
could also press the small arrow button at the bottom of the window to isolate viewing
to only the selected object as well. Expand the tracks displaying the rotation keys for
the Spotlight. Isolate the track that shows change over time by clicking on it,
representing the animation of the lamp over the 30 frames. It will probably be the Z
Euler Rotation (Spot), the blue curve.
With the curve selected, go to the
Channel menu, Extrapolation
Mode, and Linear Extrapolation.
The curve should now extend infinitely
in both directions. Test your animation
by pressing the Play button in the
Timeline, or hitting Ctrl-A. The lamp
should spin the entire animation.

The lamp speed should be fine, but if you wish to speed it up or

slow it down, you could
select the rotation keys
at frame 30 in the Dope
Sheet and move them
to a different location. The curve will adjust.

10-9
Chapter 1- The Blender
Adding Motion Interface
to Your Scene
Now its time to animate the
water. We want to create some
rolling waves, not too fast or slow.
This is a little trial-and-error. Ive
tried to take some guess work out
of the process. To begin, select the
Water Plane Water Plane and go to your
Texture buttons and find the Offset
settings in the Mapping panel. We
will animate the Offset Z number.
Because we used a 3D texture and not an image to create
the water effect, it can be animated to give the illusion of
motion. Remember that we added 2 textures to the water.
Right now, we are only animating the 1st texture.

At frame 1, place your cursor over the Offset Z number and

press the I key to inset a key frame. The Offset blocks will
turn yellow, indicating that a key has been placed on them.

Now advance to frame 50 and change the

Offset Z number to 0.1. This will cause the
water to roll up slightly. Again, with your
cursor over the Offset Z button, press I to
insert a key frame. This will cause the texture offset to roll from
frame 1 to 50. Since we cant really hit Alt-A to see the animated texture in the window,
we have to wait until we animate a movie to see the speed and effect. If you place
your cursor in the properties window area and hit Alt-A you will see the number
changing in the Offset Z block.

It's now time to extend the curve for the

texture setting just like we did for the spinning
lamp. First, go over to your Graph Editor
window and find the material tracks for the
plane. Remember that you can isolate your
view to just the plane with the arrow button.
Select the Z Offset curve, go to the
Channel menu, Extrapolation Mode, and
Linear Extrapolation. Don't worry if you do
not see much of a curve due to the small
change we placed on the setting.

We also want to animate the Ocean Modifier we used on the water plane as well. To
do this, go to the Modifier properties panel while the
water plane is selected. We will be applying an
animation to the Time setting in the panel.

10-10
 Adding Motion to Your Scene & Challenge
In the Modifier panel, find the Time setting. Make sure you
are currently on frame 1 and press I while over the time
setting. Move to frame 200, change the Time setting to 5.00
and press I again. At the bottom of the panel, change the
End Frame under Bake Ocean to 200 (the length of our
movie). Press the Bake Ocean button for Blender to
calculate the animation of the waves. You will see a
progress bar at the top of the
screen to let you know when it is
finished.

To make the animation run smoothly, go to the Graph Editor

window and find the Time (Ocean) curve. Select it, press T
to change the type to Linear to make the animation even.

Thats it for animation for now. We have animated the camera moving, the lamp
spinning and the waves rolling. Later, we will add some rain using particles. You can
always change your resolution percentage size to animate faster and check your wave
effects. Check your movie setting and press Animate in the Scene buttons. Sit back and
wait for your movie to animate.
** Call the instructor when finished**

Challenge Task: Logo or Sculpture Animation

Remember the Logo challenge
activity in chapter 3? It is now time
to create an animation of that
scene. Think about other professional
logo animations seen in movies and
advertising. What can you animate?
Try moving the camera and objects,
materials, and even the sky. Create
reflective materials and other
effects. If you did not create a logo,
try animating the sculpture you
created earlier in chapter 3.

** Call the instructor when finished**

10-11
Chapter
Chapter 1-
10The Blender Interface
Reflection
Chapter 10 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Key-frame Animation Basics

It will be hard to watch an animated movie the same way again now
that you know some of the basics of 3D modeling and animation. Key-
frame animation is just one way to animate an object. Several more
methods will be discussed in later chapters. Take some time to reflect
on your experiences by answering these questions:

1. Inserting key frames in the proper locations can be difficult. Motions can run too
fast or slow, appear jerky and inconsistent, or just not move the way you wanted
it to move. From your own experiences in this chapter, what did you find the most
difficult? Why?

2. If you make an entire animation and find out the entire sequence runs too fast,
do you need to delete the keys and start over? How can you fix the problem?
There are several ways to do this. Several ways can be addressed using
information in this chapter, one way can be found in the Render properties panel.
Explain 2 ways to correct this problem of speed.

3. Key-frame animation is one way to animate a scene. Stop-motion, motion

capture, and applied physics are other ways to create animations. Research the
internet and briefly explain how at least two of these techniques work.

10-12
 Chapter 11- Adding 3D Text
Weve discussed creating a lot of objects so far, but 3D text can be considered a very
important element to add. There are 2 ways to create text for Blender scenes. One way
is to use the built-in text generator. The other method is to use an external program to
generate the text and import it into Blender. Each method has its benefits and
disadvantages. Text made in Blender can be easily changes by entering edit mode
(Tab key) and 3D features can be changed by making adjustments in the edit
buttons. Text made in an external program like Elefont may give you additional options
and different fonts.

Blender 3D Text Settings

To create text in Blender, select the
location of your text with the 3D cursor,
then press Shift-A to Add. Select
Text. The word Text appears on the
screen in Object mode as a flat, 2D object. To change the
text, enter Edit mode (Tab key). Go to the Font Settings.
Text can easily be changed by entering edit mode again.
Some text settings are similar to many text programs while
many are not. Here are your basic options:
Shape Panel:
Set the resolution quality and 3D filling options.
Geometry Panel:
Most common setting- Offset will make the text appear
more bold; Extrude gives thickness (depth), bevel angles
the edges of the extruded text. You can use a curve
object to effect taper and bevel shape.

Font Panel:
This is where you set the font style you wish to use.
Blender's font is the default, but can be changed to any
True-Type font. If using a Windows PC, you can typically
find a font folder in the C:Windows folder. Shear will take
the place of the Italic setting. Text on Curve can be used
to shape text.
Paragraph Panel:
Typical justification setting and spacing options.

Text Boxes Panel:

By default, text can run on a long as you wish, but you
can assign a box to keep text contained.

The text to the left has been extruded

and a bevel applied. Some fonts will
work better than others depending on
how the font was created.

11-1
Chapter 11- Adding 3D Text
RoboDude Asks Why is my text pointed up?:
Text enters facing up (top view). Remember that you can check the Align to View button
at the bottom of the tool shelf when you create the text.

Creating Text on a Curve:

Blender text has the ability to follow a

Curved Path. In order to create curved text, Text
hit Crtl-A, select Add, Curve, then
Path (or any other curve shape). Enter Edit
Mode and shape the curve as desired, then Curve Path
hit Tab to exit edit mode.

After you create the text and have the text selected, go to the
Font Settings and find the box Text On Curve. Click in the box to
show all available curves that can be used to deform the text.
The text will take the
shape of the curve.
You may need to
change the spacing
of the text so it flows
properly.

Other curve objects can be used as

well to shape the text. So you don't
accidentally erase the curve while you
work, place the curve in an unused
layer (M key).

RoboDude Says:
When extruding text for normal titles and labels, be careful
not to extrude the text too thick. It may effect how well the
text can be read.

Converting Text to a Mesh

At times you may need to convert
text into a mesh for certain purposes
(i.e. using a Build or Particle Effect).
To convert text into a mesh, press Alt-C to select Mesh from
Curve/Surf/Text. In edit mode, the text will now display with vertices.
Occasionally, you may feel limited with Blender text. In these cases, you
may wish to use an external 3D text program like Elefont which saves
files in standard DXF format, then import them into your Blender file.

11-2
 3D Text- Company Logo
Create a new Blender scene and set up the views any way you wish. You will be
creating a company logo of your choice with text. Keep it simple and utilize meshes,
textures, lighting effects and ray-tracing to enhance your scene.

When you finish setting up your scene, render a JPEG image and save it to your
directory.

Note: The text you see in the scene below was placed on a Bezier Circle Curve. If you
leave the circle in the scene it will render faced. The text was converted into a mesh,
then the curve deleted. The water was created the same way we did the water in the
lighthouse scene (with much less Normal) with ray mirror added. The wall also had a
normal applied to give the brick texture some relief.

** Call the instructor when finished**

11-3
 Challenge Task & Chapter 11 Reflection
Production Logo
At the end of this book, you will create a movie of all of your work. Just like a
professional movie, you will display a short animation of your very own production logo
at the beginning of this movie. Create an 8-10 second long animation of your own
personal production logo. For inspirational research, look at several popular movie
company logos to see how some effects could be done in Blender. Some are as simple
as animated text and lighting effects to space scenes. Render your movie using your
class-determined render settings and formats.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Chapter 11 Reflection and Wrap-up:

3D Text in the World

3D text can add depth to any image or movie with professional-looking
results. Even 3D text rendered with a transparent background can
make a great title overlay in a movie.

1. Select a popular movie company's logo that uses 3D text and can be seen in
blockbuster movies. How do they use text effects to create a stunning logo? Explain
your thoughts.

2. Some standard text fonts do not work for 3D models. They will not extrude properly or
can exhibit strange bevel effects. This isn't just a Blender issue, but an issue with all 3D
modeling programs. Why do you think this is a problem? Research the internet to see if
your thoughts are correct. Explain.

3. Text on a curve typically only work one way (curving along the
base), but how could you curve it upright, as shown here? There are
several ways to do it. How would you make it work? Research the
internet if needed. (Hint: convert it to a mesh). Explain your answer.

11-4
 Chapter 12- NURBS & Meta Shape Basics
When you press Shift-A for Add, you will notice other object types beside meshes,
cameras and lights that can be created. Two types of objects that can be created are
Surfaces (NURBS) and Meta Objects. A lot can be said about surfaces, but for this
tutorial, I want you just to become aware that they are there and describe some basics
about them. Meta objects have been expanded to a variety of shapes and can be
used to give you a liquid metal effect where the objects pull together as they
become close to each other.

Using NURBS to Create Lofted Shapes (surfaces)

If you look at the Surface menu, you will see a variety of shapes
that can be created. These shapes can be use as they are or
converted to meshes so you can work with traditional vertices.
To convert a surface into a mesh, select the object and press
the Alt and C keys and choose the appropriate option.
You can do a lot with NURBS and there are several tutorials on-
line describing them, but for now, we will just work with a NURBS
Circle to create an interesting looking tunnel.

Creating a Lofted Tunnel

This process will take several profiles of a NURBS Circle
and connect them together. First thing you need to do
is create a NURBS Circle. To do this, press Shift-A,
select Surface and NURBS Circle. In Edit Mode,
select the points and shape the circle a bit. After
shaping, exit edit mode.

Change your view so you are looking at

the edge of the circle (try front view if
circle was made in a top view). You may also want to
switch to a wireframe view. Use the Shift-D keys to
duplicate the circle several times. Then rotate your view
so you can select each circle and edit the shapes in
edit mode (Tab key).

After shaping the circles, exit edit mode and

select them all by RMB clicking on them
while holding the Shift key. To join them
together, press Ctrl- J. For the final step,
press Tab for edit mode, A to select all
verticies, then F for face. Your result
should be a lofted object. You can control
the detail of the shape in the Object
Data panel. If you need it to be a mesh,
press Alt-C. This is a great technique for
making boat hulls and other related items.

12-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
12-The Blender
NURBS Interface
& Meta Shape Basics
Liquid and Droplet Effects Using Meta Shapes
Up until a few releases ago, Blender only had the capability
to make one Meta shape- a ball. Interest grew, programmers
added other shapes and cleaned up the code. You can
now make several different meta shapes in Blender. They all
work with the same principle. As the shapes get close to one
another, they begin to pull and flow together. As meta
shapes combine, their mass grows which is ideal for certain
animations. Meta shapes can be animated like other objects
and can be textured. Ray-tracing settings like reflection and
transparency can also create some stunning effects. Meta
shapes are created like other objects, except that the first
shape acts like a parent to the other shapes . As that shape is
moved, the others display a rotation. Materials are also linked for all meta shapes.

Meta shapes can seem a bit confusing at first because of their interactions. For
example, individual meta objects are selected by RMB clicking on the Selector Ring
around the object. When clicking on the actual meta shape mesh itself, all shaped
are selected. Remember that meta shapes are linked and controlled by the first meta
added. By selecting the object, materials are linked to all shapes. Remember to select
the ring to transform just that object. Meta shapes can be scaled, rotated, moved, and
combined for different effects. You can also control the quality and effect of the meta
shapes in the properties window. Experiment with these to get a desired effect.
Selector Ring Meta Object Meta Settings

RoboDude Asks:
Why are all my Meta shapes joined together?
If you get into Edit mode while making your meta shapes, they will all join together.
Remember to be in Object mode while making Meta shapes.

12-2
 The Lava Lamp
Create a new Blender Scene, erase the initial cube and
name it Lava Lamp. For this activity, we will be
extruding circles, lofting NURB circles and using meta
balls to create an interesting lava lamp.

Begin by making a Mesh Circle in the top view and

select the Fill option in the Tool Shelf to fill the circle. In
the Front View, enter Edit Mode and Extrude (E key) the
circle to form the base of the lava lamp to a shape
something like seen to the right. You will want to Smooth
(Tool Shelf) and Auto-Smooth (Object Data buttons) the
base. Set the Auto-Smoothing angle to your desire.

We could make the

glass bottle by
extruding a circle
exactly as we did
the base, but for
practice, let's loft
the shape by using
NURBS Surface Circles. Go to the Add- Surface
menu and add a NURBS Circle.

After adding the NURBS Circle, switch to a front view and duplicate it a
few times. Size them to match the shape you want for the lamp. While
holding the Shift key, select all the circles and joAin them together with
Ctrl-J or the Join command in the tool shelf.

It's now time to give the circles a surface. Enter Edit

Mode and select all vertices with the A key. Press the
F key to face the circles. It may not look exactly as
you wish so you may need to deselect all vertices ( A
key) and box select (B key) a single ring of
vertices in the front view to move or scale
them.

When finished, the shape should look

something like the image to the left.

The final step is to convert the NURBS Surface

to a mesh. This is done by
pressing Alt-C and
selecting Mesh from
Curve/Meta/Surf/Text. Set
Smooth and Auto Smooth.

12-3
Chapter
The Lava1-Lamp
The Blender Interface
The next step it to create a top for the lamp. Do this the
same way we made the base, using a Circle mesh. After
shaping the mesh and applying Smooth and Auto Smooth,
it may look something like the image to the right. To correct
this, we need to change the Normal settings of the faces.
Enter Edit Mode and select all vertices. In the Tool Shelf, find
the options for Normals. Try pressing both Recalculate and
Flip Directions. This should correct the problem.

It's now time to get a nice render of your

lamp. Apply a nice material to all 3 objects,
using Ray-transparency on the glass bottle.
Experiment with your Fresnel and IOR
(refraction) settings. You may also want to
take the Depth setting up a bit.

With the lamp finished, it's time to

add the lava. Start by adding a
Meta Ball shape. Remember that
this first shape controls the material
and action of the other meta
shapes. Add as many meta shapes
as you wish. Scale as needed. Use
all 3 principle views to get your locations correct and all shapes
are in the bottle. Add a material and render an image.

12-4
 The Lava Lamp
Your lava lamp should look something like the image to the left. Even
though you applied a material (I used green), the meta shapes will
probably appear black. This is due to the lighting effects and the ray-
tracing on the bottle.

To fix this, go back to your Material

settings on the meta shapes and find
the Emit slider under Shading. This will
now give you a green color, but the
shapes will look flat.

Our next step is to add a Point Lamp at

the bottom of the bottle. In the lamp
settings, turn off all shadow effects for
this lamp. At your next render, you
should see some effects on your lava.

Looking better, but we can

make use of the Indirect
Lighting features discussed
back in chapter 7. Because we
used the material Emitter
feature on the lava, by making
some changes in the World
buttons, it will glow.

Go to the World button and select

Approximate in the Gather panel. Check the
box in the Indirect Lighting panel to use the
feature. Render an image and check your
results. Fine tune your adjustments if needed.

If time allows, animate your lamp and make a

movie.

** Call the instructor when finished**

12-5
Chapter 1- The
Challenge TaskBlender Interface
& Chapter 12 Reflection
The Spill
Using your design skills and
imagination, create a
realistic scene of a fluid
spill using meta shapes. A
possible scene could be
something like this. Add as
much detail and realism
to the scene as time
allows.

When finished, Save a

.png image file of your
scene.

Chapter 12 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Program Interfaces and User Reactions

NURBS is an acronym for non-uniform rational B-spline. They are useful
for making point-controlled curves in 3D and we experienced how to
generate objects in Blender using them.

1. From internet research, find an application of NURBS in Blender besides how we used
them. What did you discover? Explain.

2. Meta Shapes can be used to represent many things in 3D models and animations.
We used them to represent a spilled liquid and the lava lamp wax. Think outside of the
box. Discuss two other ways that you think meta shapes can be used in a 3D scene.
What could we use them to represent?

12-6
 Chapter 13 - Modifiers

The modifier list continues to grow with each new release of Blender. We have already
discussed the Subdivision Surface (SubSurf) and Ocean modifiers in previous chapters
and will now look at some of the other modifiers. Others will be discussed in later
chapters. Depending on the type of object selected, the modifiers fly-out may display
different options. For basic meshes, here is what you see:

Generate Modifiers
Some of the Generate modifiers are self-explanatory while others need more discussion.
Here are some of the basic options:
Array
The Array modifier works great for making
patterned copies of an object. If you
need rows and columns, add 2 Array
modifiers and set the X,Y,Z Offsets as
needed to obtain your pattern. By
checking the Object Offset button and
selecting a control object (like an Empty),
you can spin and scale the array.

13-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
13The Blender Interface
- Modifiers
RoboDude Asks: What does the Apply button do in a Modifier panel?
Until you hit apply, you can always change the settings of the feature. Once you hit the
apply button, the modifier panel disappears and the feature becomes fixed and
unchangeable. For example, applying a bevel modifier will then fix the bevel, changeable
only in edit mode by moving vertices or faces. Same effect as applying the mirror modifier.
Bevel

The Bevel modifier will apply a bevel, or chamfer, to the

edges of simple meshes. There are a few options that can be
set.

Boolean
The Boolean modifier is an important feature. It allows
you to cut holes, join meshes that recalculate verticies
and create new shapes from shared areas. To use the
Boolean modifier, create 2 shapes- one that will be
effected and one that will cause the effect. For my
example, I've created a cube and a sphere. If you want
to see the effect on the cube, select the cube and add
a Boolean modifier. In the Object box, select the
Sphere. Under Operation, select Intersection,
Union, or Difference. When you get your desired results, hit Apply. Sometimes, you
don't get exactly the results you desire and need to erase some faces or move some
vertices in edit mode. See results below:

Basic Shapes- Cube Boolean Intersection Boolean Difference Boolean Union

selected (shared area) (subtracted area) (combined area)

Build
The Build modifier will take a mesh and build, or
create, it over a specified time. Use the subdivide
command to add more faces for a better effect.
You can control the start and end frame times,
randomize and seed pattern. A useful effect for
having something appear and build in an
animation.

13-2
 Chapter 13 - Modifiers
Decimate
Let's say you made an object and subdivided it too many
times or need to simplify it for using in the game engine.
Changing the Ratio, then hitting the Apply button will
simplify the mesh.

Edge Split
Edge split allows you to split a mesh into individual faces.
Basically, you are taking the shared verticies at intersections and
duplicating them so all faces have their own set of points. Edges
are split depending on the angle setting. Hit Apply to see
results, then enter Edit Mode to select those faces.

Mask
The Mask modifier allows you to select a vertex group
previously created for the selected mesh and filter out
everything else, or just that group. To create vertex
groups, you need to go to the Object Data panel,
create a new group and assign selected verticies to
that group. Vertex groups are
used for many features in
Blender, some being demonstrated in later chapters. After the
group has been created, you can add the Mask modifier, select
the group and any other desired features like the Invert option.

Mirror
When modeling a symmetrical object (like a face, body or car), it is
useful to only model half the object. To do this, move the object's
center point to the objects mirror axis and keep all verticies to one
side of the mirror axis. Add a Mirror modifier and select the X,Y, or Z
(or multiple) axis planes and other options. You can also use another
object to mirror around. After you have shaped the object, hit
Apply to set the mesh.

Multi-resolution
Multi-resolution allows you to add different levels of resolution quality to a mesh as
rendered and displayed on the screen. Useful for speeding up working and rendering.

Screw
The Screw modifier allows you to create spiral objects
differently than the Screw option found in the Tool
Shelf in edit mode. The screw modifier works best with
flat 2D objects like planes. By default, the feature uses
the object's center point as it's spin reference, but
other objects can be selected. You can select the
spin axis, angle, step quality, and turns (iterations).

13-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
13The Blender Interface
- Modifiers
Solidify
If you are making an object like a glass or mug, if you only extrude the
outer face of the object, it will not have any thickness. The Solidify
modifier allows you to give the object some wall thickness.

Subdivision Surface
The SubSurf modifier allows you to keep
your mesh simple with as few vertices as
possible, but render as a much more detailed mesh. Try
adding a monkey head mesh, hit Smooth in the Tool Shelf,
then add a Subdivision Surface modifier. If you enter Edit
Mode, the mesh is still simple, but SubSurf has divided the
faces for more detail. Be careful not to take the setting too
high or your scene will slow down.

Deform Modifiers
While the Generate modifiers allowed certain modifications to the object, the Deform
modifiers are used to change the object or use other objects for control.

Armature
An armature is a skeleton used to deform a mesh. It can be used for
creating characters, suspension on cars and much more. Armatures
are discussed in more detail in a later chapter.

Cast

The Cast modifier can be used to round or square a

mesh. The example to the left used a UV Sphere and a
cast type of Cuboid. The sphere has started to take on
the shape of a cube. Make sure you have plenty of
vertices to get a desirable shape.

Curve
The Curve modifier allows you to use a curve to shape a
mesh. Start by creating a mesh that is subdivided or
extruded with enough vertices to bend. Create a
curve and apply the Curve modifier to the mesh (not
the curve). Shaping the curve will bend the mesh.

Displace
The Displace modifier works like the Displacement
setting in the Textures panel(discussed in the Materials
and Textures chapter). Create an object with many
vertices, apply a texture and use it with the Displace
modifier. The example to the right is a cube.
13-4
 Chapter 13 - Modifiers
Hook
Hooks are used to animate an object using another object. Often,
you will create vertex groups (discussed in Chapter 13 and 16)
and tie them to an object, like an Empty. With the object selected
and in Edit Mode, you can Reset and Recenter the mesh's
points for better interaction.

Mesh Deform
The Mesh Deform Modifier allows you to Bind one mesh to another
and use it to control it's shape. Vertex groups can also be assigned for
control. In order to use it, the controlled shape (the shape with the
modifier on it) must be contained within the control object and the
control object must be a closed mesh. Depending on the complexity
of the meshes, the computer may lag when the Bind button is
pressed.

Shrinkwrap
Shrinkwrap is a relatively new modifier that allows you to wrap a
mesh around another mesh. For example, a subdivided plane can
be molded around another object. You can select a target
object to wrap around and a vertex group to control the shape.

Simple Deform
Simple Deform is a handy modifier that can do
a variety of simple modifications to a mesh. You
can Stretch, Taper, Bend and Twist a mesh
using the Mode and Deform settings. The
complexity of the deform can relate the the
number of subdivisions and vertex groups used.

Smooth
The Smooth modifier will attempt to smooth out a mesh or vertex
group that may be sharper than you wish.

Wave

The Wave modifier is a useful modifier for

animating a simple oscillation effect. You
can control the axis of the wave, speed,
height, width and narrowness. If you start
with a simple plane, you will need to
subdivide it to see the oscillation. This is an
animated effect so press Alt-A to see the
results of your settings. A simple way to
make a ripple.

13-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
13The Blender Interface
- Modifiers
Simulate Modifiers
The Simulate modifiers work with Blender's physics engine in order to create animations
dealing with particles (fire, explosions, strands), cloth, fluids, soft-bodies, smoke, forces
and collisions. When applying most of these modifiers, you will need to go to the Physics
and Particles panel to adjust the settings. All of these factors are
discussed in later chapters, but here is what you can find in this modifier
stack:

Cloth and Collision

The Cloth modifier can make a mesh act
like fabric. The more vertices your mesh
contains will make it appear more realistic,
but at a cost of render time. The Collision
modifier allows other objects to react with
the cloth (also works with particles). The
example shown uses a subdivided plane as
the fabric and the sphere as the collision
obstacle.

Particle and Explode

Particle systems are used to simulate
many animation effects and
discussed in their own chapter.
Particles can simulate explosions,
sparks, fire, smoke, grass, hair, and
fireworks. After adding a particle
modifier, you can then add the
explode modifier to explode the
mesh along with the effect.

Fluid Simulation
The fluid simulations have seen improvements over
previous versions. You can create inflow or fluid masses
that splash and react.

Soft Body
The Soft Body modifier existed before Blender had the
Cloth modifier and was used to simulate cloth effects. Soft bodies can be used for
fabric effects and Jello giggle effects. You can control the elasticity between
vertices.

Smoke
The Smoke modifier was new for Blender 2.5. It can be used to
create realistic smoke effects in your scene.

13-6
 Chapter 13 - Modifiers
SoftBody
The Softbody modifier is controlled
in the Physics panel and allows
objects to flex and loose some
rigidity, like Jello gelatin or fabrics.
The cloth simulator was born out of
softbodies several years ago to
simplify the fabric process. The
example shown to the right is a
sphere being deformed by the
wind.

Ocean

The ocean simulator can be

used to create a very realistic-
looking ocean. We used the
ocean simulator for our
lighthouse scene earlier in the
book.

There are many more modifiers than we have discussed here and more will probably
be added shortly after this book is published. Remember to look at www.blender.org
and YouTube for more information about modifiers.

Mesh Errors and Modifier Problems

RoboDude Asks: I tried to use a Boolean modifier and it doesn't work- why ?
For a Boolean modifier (and many other modifiers) to work, you need to have a clean
mesh without double vertices or flipped faces. For Boolean operations, the mesh must
also be closed and solid with no missing faces to work correctly.

There are several Tool Shelf commands you may want to use if you encounter mesh
problems, especially with Boolean operations. With the mesh selected, enter Edit mode,
select all vertices, then:
In the Tools tab on the Tool Shelf, select Remove Doubles.
In the Shading/UVs tab, select Recalculate
under Normals to force the mesh to determine
the correct direction of the faces.
Finally, check to make sure there are no holes
or overlapping faces in your mesh.

This will solve most modifier problems.

13-7
Chapter
Common 1-Modifiers
The Blender Interface
Exercise
Create a new file and call it Modifiers. Create a scene using any objects and materials
you wish. Place at least one of each of the following modifiers in your scene.

- Subdivision Surface
- Build Effect
- Mesh Mirroring
- Wave Effect
- Boolean Operation

Feel free to experiment with any of the other Generate and Deform modifiers.

Render a 200 frame movie of your scene when finished.

Mirror

Boolean
SubSurf
Other useful commands:

Alt-C to convert a curve or text

to a mesh.

Tool Shelf command: move the

Origin to a better location when
using the mirror modifier.

** Call the instructor when finished**

13-8
 Challenge Task- Insect Study

Scenario:
An entomologist discovers you are a skilled 3D computer artist and commissions you to
create a 3D model of an insect they are studying. Your goal is to create a 3D model of
the insect with as much detail as possible.

Goal:

Find images of an insect on the internet that you would like to

model. Use Blender modifiers to assist you with the modeling
process (i.e. Mirror, Boolean, Smooth, SubSurf, etc.). After you
finish modeling the mesh, add appropriate materials and
textures. You can find many examples of insects made in
Blender on the internet for inspiration and guidance.

When finished, add appropriate lighting, world settings and other scene elements.
Render and save an image.

** Call the instructor when finished**

13-9
Chapter
Chapter 1-
13The Blender Interface
Reflection
Chapter 13 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Blender Modifiers
Modifiers have been designed to make your modeling experience go
much smoother, producing interesting results that would otherwise be
very difficult to create. Take a few moments to reflect on these
questions.

1. From the modifiers that you experimented with, which did you find to be the most
interesting and useful? Why?

2. The Build modifier can be used for some interesting effects. From your own
thoughts, describe one possible use for the Build modifier.

3. The mirror modifier is useful for more than just mirroring an insect. Name at least 5
situations where the mirror modifier would be useful.

4. Boolean operations form the basis for not only many 3D modeling tools, but
computer logic in general. Do some internet research on Boolean mathematics.
George Boole was a man ahead of his time. What is Boolean logic and why is it
so important for computers? Explain.

13-10
 Chapter 14 Particle Systems & Interactions

This is probably the nicest and most flexible of the Blender effects. When you turn an
object into particles, it can be used to simulate snow, fire, smoke, clouds, sparks, hair,
grass and much, much more. When an object is turned into particles, it can releases
particles per the settings you used on it and be represented by the mesh, particles, or
even as other objects. With particles, you can set the size (using halo), texture, color
and transparency through the material buttons. You can set the particles to come off
the object in a sequence or randomly by using random setting in the particle panel.
Particles can be set to be pulled using X,Y, and Z forces or gravity. You can control the
number of particles, how long the particles live, when to start and end, if they have a
starting speed and much more than we will describe in this chapter. Like all of the other
features weve discussed, experimentation beyond this chapter is the best way to learn.

Particle Settings and Material Influence

At first glance, the particle setting in Blender can seem
overwhelming! Because particles are so versatile, there
are many things that can be changed for them. We will
first look at the basic setting, then apply these settings to
a few examples. With a mesh object selected and
going to the particle settings, the first thing you need to do is press the New button to
add a particle system. After pressing New, you see several panels with options. The
example below displays all panels collapsed for easier viewing:

Basic Settings- This is where you name your system for

easier reference, add additional systems and choose
the particle type (emitter or hair) Hair is useful for any
type of strand, like grass.
Emission- Number of particles, when they emit and how
long they live when emitted.
Cache- In order to save computer processing time, you
can Bake your particles so they are remembered.
Velocity- Sets an outward, normal (exploding) or
directional force to start the particles.
Rotation- Gives your particles a spin.
Physics- Choose your physics calculation type, mass,
size and drag.
Render/Display- How the particles look on screen and
rendered.
Children- Saves render time by copying particles.
Weights and Force Fields- Controls factors like gravity,
wind, turbulence, and drag
Vertex Groups- Setting groups to control distribution.

14-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
14The Blender
Particle Interface
Systems & Interactions
Particle Panel Basics
Some of the panel basic settings are explained below:

When adding a particle effect to a mesh, think of the

mesh now acting like a collection of small parts, being
created at various points in time, living for a while, then
dying. In the Emission panel, you set the total amount of
particles, when the particles start in time, when they end,
how long each particle will live after birth and if you want
some randomness to their lives. This is where you can also
select Random for how they are emitted from the mesh,
otherwise, they may appear to come off in a sequence.

The Cache panel is useful for saving you particle calculations so

working and rendering can run faster. Every time you make a
change to your particle settings, the computer needs to
recalculate those changes over time. Saving this data in a
folder or file will help a lot. This is called Baking. When you press
Alt-A to see an animation on screen, Blender will temporarily
Cache the data in memory while you work, but won't save it for
a future session.

The most important settings in the Velocity panel are

Normal and the X,Y,Z settings. Normal controls the
outward force of the particles while X,Y,Z control the
directional push. You also have a few other setting to
adjust. The Random setting is also important to make the
effect look more real.

RoboDude Asks: There are a lot of settings- how do I keep them straight?
It is best to only make one or two changes at a time and test them out by pressing Alt-A
to see the effects in the viewport. You can always Ctrl-Z to undo- and practice helps.

Check the box and the Rotation panel gives you options
related to how the particles spin when released. If you are
looking at random spinning and dynamics, it's good to set
these high. You can also change what effects the spin (by
default it is velocity).

The Physics panel is where you can make some basic

adjustments in the physics model used (default is
Newtonian), size and randomness of particles, mass
(when dealing with gravity and reactions) and
dampening.

14-2
 Chapter 14 Particle Systems & Interactions
The Render panel provides setting for what the particles
look like rendered (F12) or animated. If the Emitter
button is not checked, you will see the particles and
not the mesh that they are emitted from. You can also
chose to see Unborn/Died particles. Particles can also
be represented different ways such has Halo (material
settings), Line, Group, or an actual Mesh Object.

The Display panel basically controls how your particles

look on the screen. You can have them display what is
actually rendered, Points, Circles, Crosses and also the
percentage of the particles (helps with work flow).

In the Emission panel, you set the amount of particles

you want for your scene, but by setting the amount to
a high setting (especially for hair or grass), you can
greatly increase render time and slow down working
on screen. The Children panel can help solve these
problems. Basically, children are copies of a given
particle so calculations only need to occur for each
particle, then copies are made and grouped around
that particle to make the scene more full. You can set
the clumping, randomness, amount of children per
particle and shape.

The Field Weights panel allows you to set useful

features like Gravity, Wind and Turbulence. For
example, if you are making a fire effect, You would
want gravity at 0 and give Z an amount in the
Velocity panel. For fireworks, only a slight gravity
would be needed.

Vertex Groups can be used to control many aspects in

particles. You can develop weights for density and other
things. We will look at using groups later in this chapter
when we use particles for hair and grass.

14-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
14The Blender
Particle Interface
Systems & Interactions
The Force Field Settings panel allows you to add
additional features to your particle system. Features
like Drag, Turbulence, Wind, Vortex, etc. can be
added and animated.

A Simple Particle Explosion (Fireworks):

Let's take some time to set up a simple particle

explosion for practice using particle settings. Start with
a new Blender scene, erase the initial Cube, then add
a UV Sphere. Scale the sphere down to about it's
original size. In the Properties window, add a Particle
System for the sphere. Press Alt-A to see the
animated particles. You should see particles dropping
off the sphere (spin your view to see the effects). Press
Esc to exit the animation and use your arrow keys to
move up in time to about frame 30. You should see
something like the example below:

The particles are dropping because the gravity is

set by default. We now need to make some
changes to resemble a firework. First, start in the
Emission panel and change the total Amount to
about 300. No need for 1000 particles for a firework.
Next, since a firework explodes over a short period
of time, we need to change the Start and End
frames to something much less. Try a Start of 50 and
an End of 52. This will cause all 300 particles to be
release in 2 frames. Since firework particles die
randomly, keep the Life at 50, but change the
Random to full (1.000). Finally, change the Emit
option from Jittered to Random to make the
release of particles more random. Test it our with
Alt-A. The particles still drop so it's time to look at
some other settings.

Next, in the Velocity panel, change the

Normal setting to a much higher number,
like 4.00. This will blast the particles
outward. The gravity still pulls them
downward a bit
to much, so we'll
fix that next. Go
down to the Field
Weights panel and set Gravity to about 0.40. Feel free to
experiment with these setting for different effects.

14-4
 Chapter 14 Particle Systems & Interactions
It's now time to put the camera in a good place and
render an image. Advance to a frame where you see the
particles well and hit F12. You will see something like this:
You may see the actual sphere in
the center of the explosion. To turn
this off, go to the Render panel
under particles (if you had the
camera selected from before,
select the sphere again) and turn off
Emitter so the actual mesh doesn't render. You could also
experiment with Trail Counts for a second release. To improve the
explosion, add a Internal Renderer material and adjust the Halo setting. (review
chapter 5) Adjust the Diffuse Color, Halo Size and try Lines and Stars. You should end up
with a nice effect.

Material Influence:
Cycles and particles present some challenges that are not present in the internal render
engine, but can give you some amazing results. Cycles needs true objects with volume
to render and particles, by default, do not have volume. Realism can often be difficult
to simulate with particles. We will examine using the internal render material strand
settings later in the chapter. For now, let's take this simple
explosion into Cycles to set up a node set that can work for
this particle effect. The first step is to add an Icosphere that
can be used to represent the particles. Icospheres have
fewer faces to render and good for faster particles. Select the
explosion again and in the Particles Render panel, select
Object and click the box to find the Icosphere. You can set
the size of the sphere particles.
14-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
14The Blender
Particle Interface
Systems & Interactions
You should have a scene that looks something like the
one shown to the left. Switch to Cycles Render at the
top of the screen and switch to the Node Editor
window. If you need a refresher on the Cycles render
engine, review chapters 4 and 5.

Start by adding an Emission shader material node to

the Icosphere (not the particle sphere). Set up the
following nodes for the explosion material:
Particle Info Node- From the Input ColorRamp Node- From the Converter node panel. Set
node panel. Use Age and the left side ramp color to a good starting, bright color
Lifetime to have the color fade and a dimmer, fading-out color on the right. Just like
out over the particle lifetime. colors fade in a real spark.

Math Node- From the Emission & Output Nodes- Increase the Emission
Converter node panel. Set to Strength to about 30 for a brighter output. Connect all
Divide to divide the lifetime to inputs and outputs as shown.
change the color over age.
Set up an appropriate world, adjust the size of the icosphere
particles, and render your scene. You should have a nicely
textured explosion. To add a realistic motion blur to the sparks,
go to the Render Properties panel and enable the Motion Blur
panel. Experiment with the Shutter setting to achieve an effect
you want.

There are many other things you can do to your

explosion from defocusing the camera to adding
transparency shaders. The internet is full of useful
particle samples.

14-6
 Chapter 14 Particle Systems & Interactions
Using the Explode Modifier
The Explode modifier adds a nice touch to
making something explode. We will use the
firework example from before to illustrate an
explosion. In the Render setting, turn on
Emitter. First, turn off Halo Lines and Stars in
the Material settings and set Halo Size
smaller, about 0.10. Add an Explode modifier
in the Modifiers panel. You may also want to
check the Cut Edges box. Move to a
frame where you can check the results. Also
try Alt-A. It's a nice start, but needs some
work to look more believable.
Now it's time to move back to the Particles settings panel. In the Emission panel, you will
want to set the Life of the particles to 250 (length of the animation) and the Random
Life slider back to 0. To set the
rotation to look more random and
real, set the Rotation and Random
setting to numbers between 0.500
and 1.000 in the Velocity panel. In
the Rotation panel, check the
Dynamic box, add a Random to the
Velocity, Randomize Rotation Phase,
and change the Angular Velocity to
Random with a number like 6.00. The
key to a good explosion is setting
most random settings high. Feel free
to experiment with other settings, but
this should give you a nice result.

If you want an explosion without the halo

particles displayed, trying setting the halo size in
materials to 0. To add more depth you your
animation, try adding a second mesh with a
different color and particle settings. This will add
levels and complexity to your scene. You can
also add a secondary material in the Materials
panel for just the particles on an object and
assign that material in the Physics Render
panel.

14-7
Chapter
Chapter 1-
14The Blender
Particle Interface
Systems & Interactions
Particle Interaction With Objects and Forces
So far, we've looked at basic setting to get particles moving, but how can we add
interactions to them? What if we want them to bounce off other objects or have wind
blowing them?

Interaction with Other Objects:

You can make particles bounce off other
objects using the Collision setting in the Physics
panel. For the example shown to the right, I've
created a sphere with a simple particle effect
applied and a plane below it. In order to get the
particles to bounce when they collide with the
plane, select the plane and go to the Physics
panel. Select Collision and experiment with the
settings under the Particles column. You can set
them to bounce, die or partly pass through.

Interaction With Forces:

Particles are able to react to forces like wind. They can now be applied directly to the
particle system (see Force Field Settings panel) or added to another object. By applying
the effect to the particle system, it can effect itself or effect other particle systems. By
applying a wind force to another object, it can be animated to simulate wind
changing directions.

For the example to the right, we will be using

an Empty as the wind force and a Sphere
with a particle effect with zero gravity. The
Empty's display has been changed to
Arrows representation for better
understanding.

With the Empty selected, go to the Physics panel and enable

Force Field. Select wind in the Type option and you will see
several circles form on the Empty, indicating the force and
direction. By default, the force
will travel in the Z-direction.
Rotate the Empty to point in the direction you wish
the wind to blow. You can then adjust the strength,
noise and other settings. For more change, you can
also animated these setting by pressing I over a
setting and changing it over time.

These setting are similar to many of the other forces that can be used on an object.
These forces can also be used on many of the other physics features that will be
discussed in a later chapter (cloth, fluids, softbodies).

14-8
 Chapter 14 Particle Systems & Interactions
Using Particles and Vertex Groups for Hair and Grass
At the beginning of the chapter we mentioned that particles can also be used to
represent hair and grass. These features can be animated to react with forces and
other objects. Hair can even be combed!

Basic Hair Settings:

For this basic setting discussion, I'll apply a particle system to a UV Sphere and switch
from Emitter to Hair in the particle properties. You will probably get something like
the scene below with long strand radiating out from the sphere. It's now time to adjust
the Hair length under the Emission
panel. I will set this example to 1.00.
We'll keep the Amount at 1000.

The result should be a render something like the one to

the left after reducing the length. There are many settings
that can be adjusted, but let's keep it simple. In order to
get something more full , random lengths, and effected
by gravity, try adjusting the following settings:

14-9
Chapter
Chapter 1-
14The Blender
Particle Interface
Systems & Interactions
Render panel- Adjust the Random slider to randomize
the hair length.

Children panel- Select Simple, then adjust the Render

amount to something like 10 for less children. This will fill
in the sphere and give more strands without adding
more particle hairs to calculate. There are also many
more settings for different effects.

Field Weights panel- Check the box at the bottom of

the panel Use for Growing Hair and adjust the Gravity
low (about 0.020).

These setting should give you a result

something like this. Feel free to
experiment with other settings.

Material Strand Settings:

The shape of the strand can be controlled in the material
settings. Put a material on the sphere and open the Strand
panel. Under Size, you will see a Root
and Tip setting. The 1st example uses
a Root size of 1.00 and a Tip size of
0.25. This creates a tapered strand. The
2nd example used a Root and Tip
setting of 5.00.

RoboDude Says:
Just like basic particles, force
fields like wind can be used to
move strands.

14-10
 Chapter 14 Particle Systems & Interactions
Creating and Using Vertex Groups:
You want to make an object with grass or hair, but
don't want the particles distributed evenly over the
entire object. We can control this with vertex groups
that assign different weights to vertices. This example
will start with a plane that has been scaled up a bit
and subdivided about 5 times in edit mode.

Next, well go to the Object Data

buttons and press the + button in the Vertex Groups panel to add a
vertex group. It might be helpful to change the name from Group to
something more meaningful.

It's now time to assign different weights to the vertices. This can be done
2 ways:
Assign weights in Edit Mode
Assign weights using Weight Painting

Assigning Weights in Edit Mode:

Enter Edit Mode, deselect all vertices and
select all those that will have the highest
density of grass(use the B or C key). In
edit mode, you will notice that a few
options will show up in the Vertex Groups
panel. Take the Weight slider to 1.000 and
hit Assign to give the selected vertices a
weight of 1, the highest density. For areas
without grass, assign them a weight of zero, and areas with middle density, a weight in
the middle. To see your results, you can change from Edit mode to Weight Paint mode
(discussed below). Weights will display as different colors.

Assigning Weights in Weight Paint Mode:

Weight Painting allows you to brush different weights onto your object.
You still need to create your vertex group as discussed on the previous
page first, then change to Weight Paint Mode. Your plane
will change to blue (indicated everything at a weight of
zero), your cursor will be displayed as a circle, and the Tool Shelf will
display the Weight Painting tools. Much like assigning weights to vertices,
you need to set the Weight you plan to brush
onto the mesh. You can also set the brush Radius
size and Strength. The strength determine the fade
of the brush. To paint the full weight, set the
strength to 1.00.

For our example, blue is a zero weight and red is a

weight of 1.00. Return to Object Mode.

14-11
Chapter
Chapter 1-
14The Blender
Particle Interface
Systems & Interactions

It's now time to apply a Particle system and

set it up for hair as discussed earlier. In order
to make the particles generate using the
vertex group we created, select your vertex
group for Density in the Vertex Groups
panel. Vertex groups can be used for many
other features in Blender.

Other Hair Effects:

We need to discuss a few other options useful for particle hair. These are shaping the
hair in Particle Mode and assigning colors to the strands other than
the main material color of the mesh. Starting with a new Blender
file, We will add a Monkey head, set it smooth and apply a
Subdivision Surface modifier to it. The next step is to add a Vertex
Group, then enter Weight Paint mode and brush weighted areas
where you wish the hair to grow. Painting may be difficult due to
the monkey not having may vertices. My example is shown to the
right with the monkey having a Goatee and a Mohawk:

Now go to the Materials panel and put an appropriate color

material on the monkey. I used a brown color. The next step is to
apply a hair particle system as previously discussed. Set hair length,
amount, and children to desired appearance. At this point, you
should be able to render an image and see results similar to these.

Looks good, but I would like to have the hair a different color. To do
this, go back to your Materials panel and click the small + to the
right of the materials list. Give it a name in the block below it and
set the diffuse color. I chose a shade of yellow. The material list will
show 2 materials set for this object. The 1 st material channel is used
for the mesh color while we will use the 2 nd material channel will be
used for the particles.

Now go to the Particles

panel and find the Render
settings. You will see a block where you set the
particle material. Set it for Material 2. This should
force Blender to use your second material for the
strands. Hit F12 to render an image and you
should see something like this:

14-12
 Chapter 14 Particle Systems & Interactions
It's now time to comb and shape the
monkey's hair and beard. Switch from
Object Mode to Particle Mode. A new set
of options will display in the Tool Shelf. By
default, you may only see the original
strands without the children on the screen.
You can check the Children option at
the bottom of the Tool Shelf. Experiment
with the different options available in
Particle Mode. By using the Comb, Cut,
Smooth and Puff commands, you can
modify the hair quite a bit.

With a little practice and patience, you can create some great
effects!.

To summarize the particles unit, by adjusting the

basic settings discussed here and experimenting
with others, you can use particles for a variety of
effects in your scenes. Need a dusty, blowing
scene? A fire with flames and smoke? Grass
blowing in a field? By browsing the forums, you
can always find someone doing something new.

14-13
Chapter 1- The
Adding Rain to Blender Interface
Your Scene
Now its time to add some rain to your stormy night.
Open up your Landscape Scene. Start by adding a
plane in the top view and scale it up a bit larger than
your ground. Move it up high enough so it is not visible in
the camera view. While in edit mode, select Subdivide
in the Tool Shelf and set Number of Cuts to 20.
Returning to Object mode, your scene should look
something like this:

Now its time to add a Particle System to make it rain.

Since we want it to be raining at frame 1, we need to start
the rain at some point before that (-100). We also want the
rain drops to last the entire animation (lifetime), be
random, and appear to be effected by the wind. Try
these setting. Press Alt-A often to check your results
(remembering to always be on frame 1). Place a dark
gray diffused material color on it for a dark, rainy look.

Number: 30000; Start: -100; End: 200; Random Distribution

In Velocity panel, Y: 4.000 for side movement
In Render panel, switch to Line. You can adjust the length of the
line with the Tail / Head settings.

Since your scene may be a bit different, feel free to adjust

these as desired.

This is a pretty simple rain effect, but quick and easy for our
scene and works well. Experiment with material setting for
a nicer look. When finished, render an image and save it
as a png (F3). If
time permits, feel
free to animate
your scene.

** Call the instructor when finished**

14-14
 Challenge Task: A Fireworks Display & Candle
Fireworks Display:

Now that you have some experience using particle systems, try to create something
challenging and realistic- a fireworks display. Watch some online videos of fireworks to
determine exactly what you see and need in a system. Do you see a trail following up
from the ground? Is there smoke? Do you see multiple colors in a single firework? How
about the background (world) settings?

Determine how many different fireworks you want

to create and the timing of the particles. Create an
animation of your scene when finished.

Candle with Particles:

Alternate Activity: Create a

simple flame using particle
systems for a candle. Like the
fireworks activity, examine
images and videos of how a
flame actually burns. You will
need multiple particle objects
just to create one flame. Is
there a smoke trail? What
colors do you see in a flame?

Create an animation of your

scene when finished.

** Call the instructor when finished**

14-15
Chapter
Chapter 1-
14The Blender Interface
Reflection
Chapter 14 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Program Interfaces and User Reactions

You have seen that particles can be used to represent a lot of effects in
a 3D model. Take some time to reflect on your experiences by
answering these questions.

1. Blender particles received their best development during the creation of the
Blender open movie, Big Buck Bunny. Search YouTube for Big Buck Bunny
and examine the particle effects used for grass and fur. What do you think? How
does it compare with other professionally animated movies? What works and
doesn't work? Explain.

2. How could particles be used in a space movie for force fields and phaser
beams? How would you attempt to use them? Explain.

3. For the lighthouse scene, you attempted to create a rain storm. How could you
create a snow storm? Explain.

14-16
 Chapter 15- Child-Parent Relationships
Using Child-Parented Objects
So far, weve talked about making and editing objects, making them look good and
how to render and animate them, but how do we make things like humans or robots or
anything else move about that have several parts connected together? This is where
child-parent relationships become useful. It allows us to link things together without
actually joining them. This allows the individual parts to move about, but still follow a
master object.
The concept of child-parent relationships is used in all animation programs and it
involves an object assigned the role of a child and an object assigned the role of a
parent. If the parent moves, rotates or scales, the child must do so too. On the other
end, a child can move, rotate or scale without affecting the parent. An example would
be: a hand is the child of the forearm while the forearm is the child of the upper arm
and the upper arm is the child of the torso. Therefore, if the forearm moves or rotates,
the hand must follow and if the upper arm rotates, the forearm and hand both must
follow. If the torso moves, the entire arm must go with it. This is how you keep a body or
machine from going to pieces!
In order to make child-parent relationships in Blender, you
need to hold down the Shift key to select multiple objects.
Select the child object FIRST, then select the PARENT object.
The child object is always selected first. If you have a string
of objects that need to be child-parented together (like the
Child Object-
arm example), you can only do 2 parts at a time so start at
Selected First
the end of the chain and do the hand and forearm first,
then forearm to upper arm and so on. After selecting the 2
objects, press Ctrl-P and select Object to make parent.
You will see a dashed line drawn between the pivot points
of the 2 objects. This shows a child-parent relationship.
RoboDude Asks: I did the Child and Parent selection Parent Object-
backwards- How do I undo them? In order to delete a Selected
child-parent relationship, select both objects and press Second
Alt-P to clear parent.

Look at the example on the next page. If we want to child-parent a few cylinders
together to make a robot arm, create a cylinder and stretch it out in edit mode by
moving one end of vertices. Remember to pay close attention to the objects pivot
point. If the object needs to pivot like an arm, you will need to keep the point at one
end of the cylinder. Always pay close attention to the objects pivot point in any case.
Its easy to forget about it when moving vertices around in edit mode. We'll look at
moving center points next page. After you shape one cylinder, exit edit mode and
press Shift-D to duplicate. Locate the cylinders and double check their pivot points.
We want to make sure center points are correct before child-parenting. Start at the end
and select the first 2 objects. Press Ctrl-P to make the relationship. Check it out to see
if its correct and go to the next set. In the next set, the previous Parent object now
becomes the Child object. Make a simple animation to check the function.

15-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
15-The Blender Interface
Child-Parent Relationships

Object Origins
(center points)

Parent Object

RoboDude Says: You can child-

parent almost any object including
cameras, paths, empties and lamps.
Child Object Great for keeping a camera attached
to an object!

Adjusting Object Origins (center points)

In the basic editing chapter, we discussed how to
move origins (center points) of objects. You were
also cautioned about moving an object while in
edit mode because the vertices will move, but not
the objects center point. To move the center
point of an object, select the object, place the 3D
cursor (LMB) in the location you want the center
point to go, and find the Origin button in the
Tool Shelf. You will have 4 options:

Geometry to Origin (centers the mass around the object's current center)
Origin to Geometry (moves the center point to the object's shape)
Origin to 3D Cursor (moves the center point to the 3D cursor's location)
Origin to Center of Mass (moves the center point to the object's mass)

In order to find a precise location, dont forget about the Shift-S command to snap to
locations. It is useful for finding exact locations of object or selected vertices. Also useful
for moving things around in 3D space. The Shift-S command is useful for finding an exact
location to move the cursor, then assigning the object's origin to the cursor's location.

15-2
 The Robotic Arm
Create a new Blender scene and set up the views any way you wish. Your job is to
design a robotic arm that is child-parented together and animated. Create all
components using planes, cubes, spheres and cylinders. Locate your object origins to
good logical pivot points. Place materials on all objects and develop a good scene
with plenty of lighting.

After you create your scene, develop a 150 frame animation of your robotic arm
moving in all directions.

Difficulty Bonus:
Try to make your robot arm pick something up off the plane!

Helpful Hint:
When animating, it may be useful to turn on the 3D
Widgets, switch to Rotation and set it to Local. It will make
setting animation keys much easier!

** Call the instructor when finished**

15-3
Chapter 1- The
Challenge TaskBlender Interface
& Unit 15 Reflection
A Simple Character:
For this challenge task, create a robot or humanoid character using child-parent
relationships to connect the body parts. The character does not need to be too
complex, but be able to walk and pose. Use and edit cubes, spheres, cylinders, etc. to
shape the character. Pay close attention to the locations of the pivot points. Add a
scene for your character and appropriate materials and lighting.

** Call the instructor when finished**

Chapter 15 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Parenting Objects
The ability to be able to animate a child after it has been parented to
another object remains a strength in any animation program.

1. Try to child-parent an object to two different parents at the same time. What
happens? Why do you think Blender won't allow you to do this? Explain.

2. Think about a spinning object with layers, like a gyroscope. How

would you child-parent and animate the model? Explain.

3. Think of a model that would benefit from child-parenting that we haven't

discussed yet. What could you use this for? Explain.

15-4
 Chapter 16- Working With Constraints

Constraint Basics
Like Modifiers discussed back in chapter
13, Constraints are provided to help with
animation. Like many other Blender
features, constraints have changed
considerable from previous versions and
are divided into 3 main groups-
Transform, Tracking, and Relationship.
Some of these we have already used
through key commands like Track To
(Ctrl-T) and Child Of (Ctrl-P).

In this chapter, we will focus on some of

the basic constraints like tracking to
various things and working with paths.

Transform Constraints:

Copy Constraints:
You can copy the location, rotation, scale, and
transforms from one object to another using these
constraints. You select the Target object to copy
from, select the axis (or inversions) and choose to use
world or local space for the axis reference.

Limit Constraints:
Like the copy constraints (location, rotation, scale,
distance), you can set axis limits for motion on an
object. Great for giving an object limited motion or
motion on a specific axis.

Tracking Constraints:

Tracking Constraints:
There are several different tracking constraints that
give slightly different options relating to how an
object follows a target and if an axis stays upright at
all times. In past chapters, we have accessed these
using Ctrl-T.
Armature Constraints:
There are several constraints in this category related to Armatures that will be discussed
in a later chapter (Inverse Kinematics, Spline IK).

16-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
16-The Blender
Working Interface
With Constraints
Relationship Constraints:

Child Of Constraint:
Works exactly like what we did in the previous chapter,
but with visual controls.

Locking Relationship Constraints:

Several other constraints in this category lock to another
object such as providing a floor level, providing a pivot
point and following a path.

Tracking To An Object
There are times you want to constrain or follow a certain object in your scene. New
constraints are being developed in Blender, but for now, we will just be talking about
the most common one used to keep the camera focused on an object- the Track To
constraint. The tracking constraint is useful in animating by saving you a lot of time and
frustration trying to place location and rotation keys on the camera in an effort to try to
keep your target centered. When used in conjunction with Paths (discussed in this
chapter), you can create very smooth animation paths. Objects besides cameras can
also be used with tracking.

To set up a simple camera tracking

constraint, Select the camera first, then the
target while holding down Shift. Press
Ctrl-T and select Track To Constraint.
Sometimes its convenient to target an
Empty object (created in the Add menu,
like we used in the lighthouse scene). This
allows you to move your target around in
your scene so the camera can focus on one
object for a while, then move to something
else by moving the target in that direction.
You also have an influence option where
the camera will track solidly to the object or allow some flowing of the camera.

The other way to apply the Track To constraint

is through the Constraints panel discussed in
this chapter. However, by pressing Ctrl-T, this
constraint will automatically be placed in the
stack. You can even choose to follow a vertex
group, lock to specific axis and space, and
even choose the amount of influence of the
tracking.

16-2
 A Camera That Follows The Arm
Open the Robot Arm scene you made in the last exercise and add a camera
constraint. You may target any part of the robot arm you like or create an Empty and
target the camera to that. In the scene below, the camera was targeted to the gripper
head. In the Object properties panel, I renamed the sphere on the gripper head to
head. If needed, experiment with the axis settings to get the camera to pint to the
object.

After you create your scene, develop a 150 frame animation of your robotic arm
moving in all directions with the camera also doing some movement.

** Call the instructor when finished**

16-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
16-The Blender
Working Interface
With Constraints
Following Paths and Curves
Sometimes, you need to have an object flow along a smooth path in an animation. For
example, it would be easier to have a spaceship flow along a line that angles and
banks along that line then it would be for you to insert location and rotation keys
throughout the animation. Paths and Curves are found in the same Add menu and can
not only be used to create animation paths as discussed above, but can also be used
to create extrusions. To create 3D extruded objects, you need to create a 2D sketch of
a profile and a path for that shape to follow along. In this chapter, we will be working
with both.
Following Paths:
Your first step is to create a path. Any type of Curve in the
Add menu can be used as a path, but lets use the Path
option. Hit the Shift-A, select Add, Curve, then Path. You
will then get a path on the screen. Enter Edit mode and
you will see several points and arrows pointing the direction
of the path. You will also see some options in the Tool Shelf
related to the path, including Switch Direction- useful if
you shape the path in the wrong direction and
find out after you place the camera on it.
Shape the path as desired, add more vertices
through Subdivide if necessary and exit Edit
mode. You can also select an end point and use E to
Extrude.

There are several ways to get the

camera, object or lamp to follow
the path. For now, well stick to
the traditional way by creating a
Child-Parent relationship. Select
the object first, then the path (the
parent). With both objects
selected, press Ctrl-P to make a
parent. Youll see several options- select the Follow Path
option. You will see a dashed line between the 2 objects. Press
Alt-A to see the animation along the path. In order to get the
object exactly placed on the line, move the object and place
it. Rotate the object to point in the correct direction as well.
Right now the objects animation is exactly 100 frames long. To
change this, make sure the path is selected and go to the
Object Data buttons. heres what you see:

Frames- Adjust the time it takes to traverse the path.

Follow- If selected, the object will rotate as it follows the
path. If not selected, the object will follow, but not
curve.

16-4
 Chapter 16- Working With Constraints
RoboDude Says: You can close a path to make it a continuous loop.
While in Edit mode, select the 2 end point and press F to fill the object. The path
will now be closed.

Sometimes you dont want the camera to follow along

the path, but look at an object as it flows along the
path. This is where you would want to use the Path, but
not the Follow option. Instead, you would put a Track To
constraint on the camera so it looks toward an object
(empty) as it moves along the path.

Other Curve objects can be used as paths also. For

example, if you want a circular path, select the Bezier
Circle option from the Curve menu. If the circle appears
filled when rendered (F12), change it from 2D to 3D in the
Object Data panel.

Using Curves for Extrusions:

You can create a shape and extrude it along a path in
Blender. For our example, we will shape a Bezier Circle
and extrude it along a Bezier Curve. First, create a Bezier
Circle from the Add-Curves menu and shape it into an
interesting object. Feel free to add more points with the
Subdivide command. Second,
create a Bezier Curve and
Bez. Curve
shape it into some shape. Bezier
shapes form differently and use
spline points. Experiment with
them to get the feel of working
with them. Go to the Object
panel and name both objects in
Bez. Circle
the data block.
Finally, select the Bezier Curve and go to the Object Data buttons. You will see a Bevel
Object box in the Geometry panel. Select the circle object. You will see the shape
extruded along the curve! You can
still shape the circle and the curve
(in edit mode) and scale the
objects. Play with the Resolution
setting in the Shape panel on both
curve objects and hit Alt-C if you
wish to convert it into a mesh.

16-5
Chapter 1- The
Challenge Blender
Task- Interface
A Simple Rollercoaster
For this exercise, you will be using paths and
curves to create a roller coaster track. Start with
a new Blender file and create a Path from the
Add-Curve menu. Shape it in both the front and
top views so you have curves and hills. Close the
path by selecting the end points and pressing F
to fill.

Now add a Bezier Circle. Scale it down

about size, enter Edit Mode and move the
entire shape to the left of it's center point.
Press Shift-D to duplicate the circle (still in
Edit Mode) and move it to the opposite side
Center Point
of the center point. These will be extruded
as the track rails. Return to Object Mode.

At this point, select your track and hit Shift-

D to duplicate it once.

With one track selected, go to the Object Data panel and select the circle object
under the Bevel Object option. You may need to select the circle object and scale it
down considerably for it to look right. You may also need to enter Edit Mode for the
track and use Ctrl-T on some points of the curve to twist them to a better curve.

If the rails are not centered over the path, the Circle's center point may not be directly
between the 2 circles. If so, correct the issue.

16-6
 Challenge Task- A Simple Rollercoaster
Now, select the other path that you duplicated earlier and move it up slightly so it is
easier to select. Select the Camera, then this Path. Hit Ctrl-P to make a Follow Path
constraint. A dashed line will display between the two objects. It may take some time to
get this correct, but move the camera to the dashed line's contact point. Adjust the
camera angle and test the animation with Alt-A. Experiment with this until you are
satisfied with the animation. If it is too fast, adjust the curve settings in the Object Data
panel.

Add a world to your scene and animate a 100 frame movie.

Extreme Challenge Exercise:

Duplicate the curve one more time and extrude walls

around your coaster to make it into a mine tunnel. Add
textures and animate. To duplicate a mesh along a path,
create a mesh object and child-parent it to the path.
With the mesh selected, set Duplication to Frames,
Speed off. Select the curve path and adjust the frames
to get the correct number of duplicates in Object Data.

** Call the instructor when finished**

16-7
Chapter 1- The Blender Interface
Unit 16 Reflection
Chapter 16 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Constraints and Paths

In this chapter, you experiences some of the constraints that are
available to simplify your modeling and animation process. Take a few
moments to reflect on these questions.

1. Take a look at the Copy and Limit Transform Constraints. These constraints
are great to have objects copy the motion of other objects or limit an object's
motion. Explain at least two examples of where these features could be useful.

2. In the extreme challenge portion of the roller coaster track activity, you have the
option to try to add mesh objects along a path. How could you use this feature,
and the path extrusion feature, to create a mine tunnel ride? If necessary, find an
example on the internet. Explain.

3. Research the internet, or draw from personal experience, where one of these
constraint features may have been used in a professional movie. What did you
find? Explain your example.

16-8
 Chapter 17- Armatures
Using Armatures to Deform Meshes
Blenders animation capabilities are great for most object animation except when you
want to animate something bending like a person in motion or a tree bending in the
breeze. This calls for a mesh to deform which cant be done with traditional modifiers.
We can deform a mesh in 2 ways in Blender. One way is to create a skeleton and have
it deform a mesh (armatures) and the other method is to move the mesh vertices in edit
mode and create sliders that deform the mesh (vertex keys). This chapter deals with
creating armatures. The armature feature in Blender is constantly under development.
For this discussion, I will stick with the fundamentals. More information can be found at
www.blender.org or at www.blenderartists.org.

The first thing you need to do is create a mesh that has a few groups of
vertices where you would like the object to bend. Any mesh will work and
to get additional vertices you can either extrude or subdivide. Be careful
not to create too many vertices. It may slow your model down
considerably. Lets use a cylinder to create an arm. I will use a cylinder set
at the default divisions of 32. Next, I will change to a front, ortho view and
box select the top set of vertices and Extrude them up. I prefer to use
extrude rather than subdivide to keep the vertex count down as low as
possible. As I extrude the vertices, I am also using Scale to shape them.

Next, place the 3D cursor directly at the bottom of the

shape you just made. Hit Shift-A, to add an Armature-
Single Bone. You will immediately see a bone begin to
form at the cursor location. Enter Edit Mode and type G to grab the
top of the bone and lengthen it to a desired size. Move your cursor up
to lengthen the bone and click where you would like the joint to be. To
create another bone at the top of the first one, press E to extrude
another bone from the first one. If you run out of room to drag the
mouse up, just click wherever and hit G again to move the end. To
always adjust bones, you must be in Edit mode. Also, make sure you
have the end of the bone select and not the entire bone. When
finished, press Tab to exit edit mode. Double check the armature to
make sure that the ends and joint are well aligned. To add more bones,
enter edit mode again to extrude with the end bone selected.

Your next step is to create a Child-Parent relationship between

the mesh and the armature with the mesh being the Child and
the armature being the Parent. While holding the Shift key,
select the mesh first, then the armature. Press Ctrl-P to make
parent. Select the option Armature Deform and With
Automatic Weights so the computer will figure out which
vertices to deform to which bones. If it's not right, we can fix
this later.
17-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
17-The Blender Interface
Armatures
To test the armature system you just created,
select the armature only and switch from Object
mode to Pose mode. Right-click on the top bone
and rotate it. It should deform the mesh as you
rotate the bone. By rotating the lower bone, you
will rotate the entire mesh.

RoboDude Says:
If you ever need to return to edit mode for the mesh or the
armature after posing, they will temporarily return to their un-
posed states.

Creating Complex Armature Chains:

Extruding bones as we did works well for simple chains, but if

you want to make more complex chains and skeletons, you'll
need to know a few more things then just extruding from the
end of a chain. You will notice that the 1 st bone you created
is the master parent for the system and you can also extrude
from the bottom of that bone. The problem is that, in Pose
mode, this bone will not be automatically parented to the
master bone. You can also make entirely different armature
chains, then Join them together using Ctrl-J. In pose mode,
these will also not function with the entire system. So how do
you correct these child- parent issues?

First, you need to know the Name of each bone.

In Pose mode, you can RMB click on a bone and
the name will display, but you can have all the
bone names display on the screen if you turning
on an option in the Object Data panel (now
displayed as an armature). The example shown
consists of
Edit Mode for 2 different
Parenting armature
objects
that have
been joined together in Object mode using
Ctrl-J. When you enter Pose mode, they do
not move together. In the Display panel, you will
see an option to display the names on the
screen. You will also see some options to
change the way the bones look. To correct the
parenting issue, go to the Bone panel, enter Edit
mode and find the option for Parent. Select the
bone you wish to parent to.

17-2
 Chapter 17- Armatures
Animation Tips:
When animating an armature, there are a few techniques that can make your life
easier and were discussed previously in the animation chapter, but will be reviewed
here. Since you have so many bones to animate, it makes sense to use the Automatic
key-frame feature. It is also helpful to use the Rotation transform manipulator and the
time line to advance through time. It may be helpful to review the chapter on
animation for assistance. Below are some of the basic setting that we use for animating
armatures: Screen Layout: Rotation Widget:
Switch to animation Makes rotation easier

Time Line: Transform Widgets: Automatic Key-frames:

Can move to key- Turned on, set to Rotation and Record button on and set for
frames quickly with Normal alignment. Used to rotate Available. Remember to turn it off
controls bones by grabbing the right axis. when you don't need it!

RoboDude Asks: Why doesn't my armature animation start correctly on frame 1?

When working with automatic key-framing, don't forget to move every bone a
little at frame one to set the initial animation keys, then move up through time to
make your next move. A lot of people forget to add keys to frame 1.

17-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
17-The Blender Interface
Armatures
Creating Bone Vertex Groups
Using the Automatic Weights option works great for simple
meshes and armatures, but when bones and mesh vertices
are close together or far from the bone, Blender will have a
difficult time deciding how to join them. In the example to
the right, you can see that some vertices for one finger have
been grouped with the bone beside it. We can alter these
vertex groups.
RoboDude Says: Notice how you can see the
bones through the mesh in solid view in the
hand example?
There is an X-Ray option in the Object Data-
Display panel that makes viewing armatures
easier!

With The bone Names turned on so you can see which ones you need to effect, select
the mesh and enter Edit mode. Editing bone vertex groups is similar to making normal
vertex groups except that Blender already named a vertex group to match every bone
for you when you made the child-parent relationship. If you go to the Object Data
panel (mesh selected in edit mode), you will see the list of groups in the Vertex Groups
panel. You will also see the
standard Assign and Remove
buttons below the groups.

To fix the problem, you will first

need to select the vertices you
wish to change, then select the
vertex group that they are
wrongly assigned to. Hit the
Remove button to remove
them from that vertex group. In
this case, they are wrongly
assigned to Bone.004. Now
select the vertex group they need
to be assigned to (Bone.010) and
hit the Assign button. Exit edit
mode, select the armature and move the bones in pose mode to test your groups.

For vertices that are close to a joint, they can be shared between multiple groups. You
can also use the Weight slider to adjust the bone influence for other effects, but
normally, it is set to 1.000.

Need to take your posed armature back to it's

starting pose? Change it from Pose Position to Rest
Position in the Object Data.
17-4
 Chapter 17- Armatures
Using Inverse Kinematics (IK) and Constraints
Inverse Kinematics is used when you wish to manipulate a skeleton by simply grabbing
(G key) the end bone of a chain and moving it with all of the connected bones
following along. Inverse Kinematics is constantly under development and has a lot of
options available depending on what you want them to do. Visit www.blender.org for
more details and review the wiki documentation.

To use Inverse Kinematics, select the bone at the

end of a chain, go to Bone Constraints and add an
Inverse Kinematics constraint. You can control the
number of bones in the chain (Chain Length) and
even give it a Target to point to, like an empty. There
are a few other options available including
Influence (amount of effect). Once applied, you
can use the G key to move the bone around while
all those in the chain below it move in relationship to
it.
RoboDude Says: Press Ctrl-A to reset an
object's rotation and scale. Works with
individual bones in Pose mode. This help's
a lot with these constraints!
Using Rotation Constraints:
When animating an object (like a finger), you
may want to limit the direction and angle the
object can bend or some unnatural things
may occur when you try to add animation
keys. Using Limit Rotation constraints can help
with that. For the example to the right, I've
applied a rotation constraint to the top 2
bones of the finger limiting the Y and Z axis to
a limit of 0 degrees while the X axis can
rotate from 0 to -60 degrees. This works because I switched the Convert from World
Space to Local Space.

Copy Rotation:
Copy Rotation can make animating chains
easier. In the example, I've created a single
bone armature (not a bone in the existing
armature) and child-parented it to the hand
armature. This bone can be placed anywhere
you wish. I have mine above the finger that it
will control. Set it's rotation limits with the
Rotation constraint discussed above, then add
a Copy Rotation constraint to each bone
that will copy it's movement. Select the control
bone for the Target. In my case, I needed to Invert the motion to work correctly.

17-5
Chapter
Create a1-Hand
The Blender Interface
With Armatures
In this exercise, you will be creating a simple hand using meshes and
armatures. Start a new Blender file and call it Hand. As discussed at the
beginning of this chapter, make a simple finger using a cylinder or filled
circle. Extrude it to have 2 joints and looks something like this:

Now duplicate (Shift-D) the finger 4 times, scaling

and rotating them into the shape of a hand. Don't
worry if it doesn't look perfect- this is just a simple
exercise. Try for something like the image to the left.

In order to add the palm of the hand, I used a UV

Sphere and scaled it in the Y direction to make it
narrow and used Proportional
Editing to shape it to fit the
fingers. Try shaping yours into
something like this.

After shaping, select all of the

meshes and Join them
together (Ctrl-J).

It's now time to add the

Armature. We will only be
animating the fingers opening and closing for this
exercise so we only need bones in the fingers. Place your 3D Cursor at the base of one
finger. As discussed in the chapter, add an Armature, then enter Edit Mode and pull the
top end of the bone to align with a joint. Extrude (E) 2 more bones to
fill the finger. Exit Edit Mode and return to Object Mode.

Now Duplicate the armature (Shift-

D) and place it in the next finger.
Enter Edit Mode and move the bone
joints to match the mesh finger
joints. Exit Edit Mode and continue
duplicating and adjusting armatures
until all fingers are finished. When
finished, use Ctrl-J to joint all the
armatures together.

17-6
 Create a Hand With Armatures
It's now time to create the
child-parent relationship for
the mesh to the armature.
Use Armature Deform
and Automatic Weights
as discussed in the chapter
when using Ctrl-P to
make the relationship.
Remember to select the
Mesh first. It will also be
helpful to turn on Names
and X-Ray in the Object
Data panel. Feel free to
change the display type in
that panel as well if you
wish.

Enter Pose Mode and test your armature out to see if it works well or if you need to
adjust vertex groups. If it needs adjustment, follow the steps of re-assigning vertices to
the various bone groups discussed in the chapter.

When everything looks good, create a simple 200

frame movie of the hand moving.

Challenge Exercise:

Add constraints to limit rotation or control armatures

with rotation copy constraints.

** Call the instructor when finished**

17-7
Chapter 1- The
Challenge Blender
Task- Interface
Flubber Character
In 1997, Robin Williams starred in a remake of the 1961 movie The
Absent-Minded Professor called Flubber. In the remake, Flubber is a
green gelatinous material with a mind of it's own.

Search YouTube for some video clips of the Flubber character to get a
sense of this project. Some possible video clips could be:

https://youtu.be/HJT2QOpnYb8 Discovering Flubber

https://youtu.be/KyPqOt_Pgiw MAMBO!" Of Walt Disney's FLUBBER Movie

Note: These links were active at the time of publishing and have been active for years. You may
need to search for other links.

For this challenge task, you will create a

Flubber character with armatures and
create a short 200 frame animation with
appropriate background, objects, and
lighting of your choice.

Back in Chapter 12 you were introduced

to Meta Shapes. Meta Shapes are the
perfect element to use to create the
body of your Flubber character since
they act like fluids and pull together. By applying appropriate materials with
reflection, refraction, and transparency, you can achieve a very convincing Flubber.
For a refresher on Meta Shapes, refer back to Chapter 12.

Creating the Character:

Start with a new Blender scene

and create a Meta Ball from
the Add Object- Add Metaball-
Ball in the Front view. This will
act as the belly of the Flubber
character.

Duplicate the Meta ball

and continue to shape
a character of your
choice. It may be best
to keep the character
simple, with only 10-15
Meta shapes.

17-8
 Challenge Task- Flubber Character
Adding an Armature:

After you finish shaping the character, add an Armature- Single

Bone to the character's belly. Continue to extrude and shape
the skeleton of your character, using the information provided in
the chapter, until you have something similar to the image
below.

With the armature selected, enter

Pose Mode, select a Meta Shape,
then the bone you wish to control
it. Child-parent the Meta Shape
to the bone using the Bone
option.

Continue until all Meta Shapes

are Child-parented to the bones.
Test your rigging to make sure
everything works.

Create your scene and animations using the key frame techniques discussed earlier.

** Call the instructor when finished**

17-9
Chapter
Chapter 1-
17The Blender Interface
Reflection
Chapter 17 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Character Rigging
This chapter dealt with the basics of all character rigging. Every
program is a bit different, but all operate the same. Take a few
moments to reflect on what you learned.

1. After completing these activities, what did you find to be the most difficult aspect
of your work and why? Explain.

2. Internet research the job of a Character Rigger. What do they do and who do
they work with? What does the job pay and how plentiful are these jobs? What
did you learn from your research? Explain.

3. Depending on the detail in your character, rigging can be a difficult job trying to
assign vertices and weights to everything. How should characters differ between
characters designed for animation and characters designed for games?
Research and explain your findings.

17-10
 Chapter 18- Relative Vertex (Shape) Keys
Creating Mesh Shape Keys
Weve discussed deforming a mesh with an armature, but what if you want to deform a
mesh in other ways like have it flatten, move a mouth, blink an eye, etc. and have a
way of repeating that motion whenever needed? Some of these things can be done
with armatures, but sometimes its easier to set up a slider that at one end, represents
the mesh in one form, and at the other end of the slider, shows the mesh fully deformed.
See the example below:

Mesh deformation using Shape Key sliders (called vertex editing in older Blender) in the
Dope Sheet Window can be a difficult process because it requires you to shape your
mesh in edit mode moving vertices. With practice, this can become a worthwhile tool
that will enable you to make quick and high-quality animation like the professionals do.
If you notice in the above example, there are several sliders that cause different
motions. By using combinations of them, a wide variety of motions can be produced
(for example, Eyes Up/Down will combine the motions). These are great tools for making
a character speak, blink and show expression.

In order to start using shape keys, we'll start a new scene, delete the initial cube, then
add a Monkey head from the Mesh menu. To make the monkey head look better, we'll
hit Smooth in the Tool Shelf and add a Subdivision Surface modifier from the
Modifier panel. I have also rotated the monkey head to be facing forward in the Front
View in Ortho mode. Now, find the Shape Keys panel in the Object Data buttons.

In order to start using shape

keys, press the + in the
Shape Keys panel to add a
Basis group to add keys
under. This Basis is not an
actual key, but contains all
the keys you now create
under it. This can also be
renamed.

In order to add your 1 st slider,

press the + button again.
You will have another key
show up under the Basis called Key 1. It's a good idea to rename these keys to
something matching the motion that you plan to create. A good facial animation
could contain dozens of slider!

18-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
18-The Blender
Relative Interface
Vertex (Shape) Keys
We will now create the motion for this Key 1. You will notice a
relative block checked by default, meaning that the motion
we create is relative to this initial face shape. You can change
the name of the key by double clicking it. Right now, it doesn't
do anything because we haven't deformed the mesh. There
are also range settings and group references we won't be
working with now. I usually keep the value of the slider set to
zero at this point.

It's now time to enter Edit Mode and alter the mesh for our first
key. I want to make the monkey look surprised for this key by
just raising his eyebrows. To do this, I will select a vertex above each eye (total of 2
selected vertices), turn on Proportional Editing and scroll the mouse wheel to change
the selection circle while moving the
vertices up. After you have the look you
wish, go back to Object Mode. The Selected
mesh should return to it's original shape. Verticies
Test the slider for the shape key. It should
transition from normal to surprised as you
move the slider.

Proportional Editing `

T o add another slider, return the value of the previous slider back to zero, then press the
+ for the next key. By lowering the slider, the next key will start with the basic mesh in
edit mode, otherwise, it will be deformed. Name
the new key, enter Edit Mode repeat the process
by shaping the mesh as desired, then returning to
Object Mode to set the shape key. Test the slider.

Repeat this process to add any number of shape

keys. It is important to return all sliders to zero
before adding a new slider if you want to create
from the untouched original mesh.

18-2
 Chapter 18- Relative Vertex (Shape) Keys
Using Action Editor Sliders
Now that you have created the sliders, it's now time to
look at an easy way to animate them. If you review the
animation chapter, you'll see a description on how to
work in the Dope Sheet window. First thing we need to
do is change our screen layout from Default to
Animation. Your screen configuration will change to
show a Dope Sheet window, a
Graph Editor window, 3D window
and Buttons. We're interested in
the Dope Sheet Window. In order
to see your shape keys, we need
to switch the view from Dope
Sheet to ShapeKey Editor at the
bottom of the window. You will
now be able to see all your shape
key sliders in the window. You
may need to adjust the size of the
window so you can see
everything.

Animation is as easy as moving a slider. As you move a slider, a small diamond will
display on the time line to the right of the key. This diamond is an animation key at the
current frame. After you set all sliders on the current frame, move up in time to your next
desired frame and adjust the sliders. You are now animated over time. With a little
practice, you will be able to
animate easily using this
technique. After you have
placed some keys along the
time line, go back to frame 1
and press Alt-A to see the
animation (or press the play
button in the time line
controls).

As you animate, you can select keys (selected keys are yellow) and copy, move and
scale them using standard Blender commands for other spots along the time line. A key
that doesn't change over time is shown by a bar between keys. Keys can also be
selected and deleted easily.

RoboDude Asks: Why are shapes changing when I haven't inserted keys?
Remember that features change over time and begin changing from one key
to the next. If a slider shouldn't change for, say, the first 50 frames, then change
from frame 50-70, you will need to set a key at frame 50 and not just at frame 1.

18-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
18-The Blender
Relative Interface
Vertex (Shape) Keys
Syncing Audio With a Shape Key:
Another neat way to animate a shape key is to use an audio file to sync with the
motion. This is a quick way to create a lip sync or an object, like a speaker, bounce with
the bass.

For this example, we are starting with the monkey head as before, but only applying
one shape key for now on the mouth. The shape starts with a closed mouth and a key
applied with a large oh shape on the key.

Initial Shape before applying the key. Shape with the value slider at maximum.

Now, switch over to the Animation screen

layout and apply a key at frame 1 with the
slider at zero and a key at frame 5 with the
slider at 1.00. The number of frames between
the 2 keys is not too important and 5 seems to
work well. All you are doing is adding 2 keys at
the minimum and maximum positions.
Now go down to the Graph Editor
window. You should see the key
graphed. Under the Key menu, select
Bake Sound to F-Curves. Browse out
to find an audio file that you plan to
use. The curve will reflect the sounds

spiking with the keys you created. If you hit the play
button at the bottom of the screen, the monkey
should be moving his mouth in sync with the audio file, but you will not hear any sound
at this point.

To add the audio to the scene, you will need to switch to the Video Editing screen
layout and add the audio file to the timeline. The Video Editor is discussed in Chapter
24.

18-4
 Chapter 18- Relative Vertex (Shape) Keys
To test your mesh shape key and facial expression skills, we are going to animate the
monkey talking and making expressions. Start a new file and call it Mesh Keys. Add a
monkey head, rotate it to face forward in the front view. Add a Subdivision Surface
modifier and press Smooth in the Tool Shelf. Create your Shape Keys as discussed in
the chapter, then switch to the Animation view configuration.

Remember that you need to create the Basis group key first, then press + again to
add the first slider. Enter Edit Mode and turn on Proportional Editing to make your first
key. Try to go for a surprised look.

Continue adding mesh keys to bring the monkey to life using proportional editing. Add
another slider to the eyes making him squint. Add a slider to move the ears. Add one to
his mouth. In total, have at least 4 shape keys. Add more for more expression if desired.

Challenge: If time allows, try adding an audio file to make him speak.

When you are finished, animate a short 200 frame movie making expressions.

** Call the instructor when finished**

18-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
18The Blender Interface
Reflection
Chapter 18 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Shape Keys in Motion

Shape keys are used heavily in the movie industry. Take a few moments
to reflect on these questions.

1. As you worked through this chapter, what did you find to be the most interesting
aspect of shape keys? What was the most challenging? Explain.

2. In the Eddie Murphy movie Haunted Mansion, shape keys, identical to Blender,
were used to animate the singing bust heads in the cemetery. Research the
internet to find how this example, or a different example, of shape keys were
used in a movie. How are they used? Explain your findings.

3. Music videos can make use of the Bake Sound to F-Curve feature, but most
audio tracks are compressed down so all instruments and vocals cannot be
separated (i.e. drums only to effect an animation, or vocals for lip sync only).
What is a multi-track recording and how does the music industry use them? How
could you use them for animations? Explain.

18-6
 Chapter 19- Object Physics

Flowing water, fabric, things falling, and even a bouncing ball can be difficult to
animate realistically using techniques we have already discussed. This is where Blender's
Bullet physics engine becomes useful. Bullet is also used to create dynamics in the
game engine, which will be discussed in a later chapter. Bullet has been used in
Hollywood blockbuster movies to simulate buildings and debris falling and I expect to
see it used more often, along with Blender, in the future. In this chapter, we will examine
some of the basic features of Blender physics.

Here are some of the basic options in

the physics panel:

Force Field: Force fields can be tied to any object and act like forces, wind, turbulence,
and many other types of forces. Wind on an Empty is great for reactions to fabric and
particles object physics effects.
Collision: Important for dynamic physics events. For example, if you want to control how
particles interact with something like a floor (bounce, slide, or stick), you would place a
collision effect on the floor. Also works with Cloth and Soft Body physics.
Cloth: As the name suggests, used to turn a mesh into a fabric. There are presets for
various types of materials.
Dynamic Paint: Dynamic paint allows you to use meshes and particles as "brushes" to
paint on other objects. The paint effect can be animated.
Soft Body: One of the oldest physics effects, Soft Bodies are used to simulate fabric,
jello, and water effects. Anything that requires a mesh to flex along it's mesh joint
points and edges can benefit from Soft Body physics.
Fluid: Flowing water can be simulated in the physics panel. Set objects as a domain,
inflow, outflow, obstacle, or fluid to create a realistic-looking fluid animation.
Smoke: As the name implies, set up a dynamic smoke simulation.
Rigid Body: This is where you can set up a dynamic interactive scene with objects
falling, bouncing, and reacting with one another. Create a falling brick wall, bouncing
ball, and domino chains. Build a Rube Goldberg invention or a better mousetrap.
Rigid Body Constraints: Create limit constraints on your rigid body objects, like hinges,
pistons, springs, sliders, and rotational motors.
RoboDude Asks: How do I remove a physics
effect?
You will notice that when you add a physics
effect, an Xwill appear on the button. Just
click the X to remove the effect. You will also
notice that you can add multiple effects to an
object.

19-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
19-The Blender
Object Interface
Physics
Creating Fabric and Fluid Effects with Interactions
Soft Bodies was one of Blender's first simulation features after Particles. Soft Bodies are
used to simulate fabric, jello, and water. While Soft Bodies still has a place in Blender
for many effects, most people are just looking for a good fabric (cloth) simulation.
Blender has pulled the fabric effects out of Soft Bodies and developed them into their
own physics modifier.

Creating Cloth Effects

We'll start with a simple scene of a plane placed above
a UV Sphere. Scale the plane up about twice the original
size and subdivide it 4 times. We will pin 2 corners of this
plane and have it drop down over the sphere like a flag.
Our next
step is to create a Vertex Group (like we
did in the Particles chapter) in the Object
Data panel. With all vertices selected,
Assign a weight of Zero. Then, select only
the 2 corner vertices and Assign a weight
of 1.00 to them. These will be the 2 pinned
corners we will use shortly. Return to Object
Mode. Now select the Sphere and add
Collision to it in the Physics panel.

In the Physics panel, add a Cloth effect to the

Plane. Without any vertex groups, the cloth will
fall and react with the sphere well (has Collision
on it) when you press Alt-A or the Play button
in the bottom timeline window. I've also used
Smooth from the Tool Shelf for both objects.

RoboDude Asks: Why does the

animation play so slowly?
Calculating physics can be intense. Let
it play through once to bake the data.
It should play faster the next time
through.

You can also use groups as before

by checking the Pinning box and
choosing the vertex group. You can
also select various material types to
simulate under Cloth Presets. There
are several other setting that can be
adjusted for obtaining that perfect
fabric.

19-2
 A Waving Flag
For this exercise, you can choose to either
use Soft Bodies or Cloth physics to make a
flag. Start by adding a plane and rotating
it to face the front view. Scale it to match
an appropriate size for a flag and
Subdivide it a few times to give it enough
vertices to flex well. Set the plane Smooth
in the Tool Shelf. Add a Vertex Group in the
Object Data panel as discussed in the
chapter.

Apply physics to the plane as

discussed before and adjust it to
get a good effect. You may want
to turn on Self-Collision. Add an
Empty to your scene and apply a
Wind Force Field to it. Adjust the
Strength setting to get a good
billowing flag effect. You may need
a high strength number (hundreds)
with a cloth simulation.

Add other details to your scene like a world background, a flagpole and anything else
you wish. Animate a short 200 frame movie when finished.

** Call the instructor when finished**

19-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
19-The Blender
Object Interface
Physics
Creating Fluid Effects
Blender fluids have received a lot of attention in in recent versions. You have the
possibility of creating realistic fluid effects with these basic setting.

With an object selected and Fluids enabled in the Physics panel, you can set it as one
of the following fluid object types (by order of importance):

Domain: Needed to contain all fluid physics. All fluid

simulations must occur within the domain.
Fluid: An actual object that represents the volume of the
fluid.
Obstacle: An object that the water can react with.
Inflow: An object that acts like water flowing into the scene
(like a faucet. Used in place of the Fluid.
Outflow: An object that acts as a drain.
Particle: Allows fluids to works as particles. More work in this
are coming in future releases.
Control: Adds additional control over fluid effects.

We will be discussing the basics in this chapter. For more details, see the Blender
documentation at www.blender.org.

A Simple Splash:
Our fist example will just contain a Domain and a Fluid. The
scene shown contains just a Cube, scaled up about twice it's
original size, as the Domain and a Sphere that will represent the
Fluid. The larger the sphere, the more fluid the scene will contain.
It is important the the sphere is completely inside the cube.

With the sphere selected, make it be the Fluid in the simulation.

You will see a few options including the ability to give it an initial
velocity, rather than just dropping due to gravity. -Z will flow
down.
Now select the cube and make it the Domain. Remember that
the domain contains the simulation and controls the baking of
the simulation. Don't be concerned if the cube turns into a
small blob due to previously cached baking. This will correct
itself when you hit Bake. You can control render quality and
time length in the domain. You can even specify a specific
folder to save the baking into so it can be referenced later.
Also, after baking, the cube is now represented by the starting
fluid. When everything is set, hit the Bake button and wait.
You can watch the status of your baking in the top program
bar or hit X to cancel it.

19-4
 Chapter 19- Object Physics
During the Bake, you will see a status bar at the top
of the screen. You may also need to delete files
from the /tmp\ folder where the bake is saved to
get it to work properly. When finished, hit Alt-A to
see your animation. To improve the appearance,
hit Smooth in the Tool Shelf and apply a
Subdivision Surface modifier. You can also
experiment with the time setting in the Domain.

This time, we will create a scene that uses an

Obstacle and an Inflow instead of a Fluid. Start by
creating a Blender scene similar to the below. The cube has been scaled up about 3
times it's original size and used as the Domain, an angled plane to act as an Obstacle,
and a small sphere that will act as
the Inflow. In the Physics panel,
the 3 objects have been set up to
reflect these items with special
attention to the following:

Sphere- Inflow Object:

Give it an Inflow Velocity to make
it flow into the scene. I used a Z of
-1.000.

Plane: Obstacle Object:

Experiment with the Slip Type for a desired
effect. This adjust how much fluid slips on the
object. I chose No Slip. Select the Domain
Cube and Bake your
animation. Remember
to watch the status bar
at the top of the
screen. It may take a
while to bake.

Animating fluids can be time consuming, but

with practice and experimenting, you can
achieve some nice result.

19-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
19-The Blender
Object Interface
Physics
Creating Volume Smoke
Volume smoke physics has seen improvements over the past few versions. With that
being said, it is still worth an introductory discussion in this edition. You can find some
nice tutorials and sample videos on the internet and the feature will probably be
updated before anyone gets to this chapter of the book, but here it is:

Volumetric smoke works similar to fluids where you create a Domain and an Emitter
(Flow). In order to generate the smoke particles, you also need to add a Particle system
and add materials and textures.

To start, we'll set up a new scene with a cube scaled to about 5

times the original size. Remember, all smoke that is created will
not extend beyond the cube domain so it needs to be large
enough for your scene. It has also been recommended that
you do not go into Edit mode and alter the vertices of the cube
because of calculation issues. Next add a Plane and place it to
the bottom of the cube as the Flow. Make sure it is completely
inside the cube! Any mesh will work for the flow, but we'll work
with a plane for now.

The smoke simulation can now either use the mesh

(plane) to generate the smoke or particles. We will use
the simpler default of the mesh, but particles could be
used for more flexibility.

Time to work on the smoke physics. With the plane still

selected, add Smoke Physics to it in the Physics panel
and select Flow. You will see blocks for Flow Source.
Make sure it is set to Mesh.

Now select the cube and enable Smoke Physics for it.
Choose Domain for it's property option. We're now
ready to take a look at our results by pressing Alt-A or
the play button at the bottom of
the screen. It will probably run
through slowly, but you should see
building smoke in the viewport
window. If you try to render a
picture at this point, all you will
see is the cube and not the
smoke. We'll fix that next.

RoboDude Asks: What can I do with smoke?

As long as everything stays within the domain, you can move the flow object and
even add a wind force!

19-6
 Chapter 19- Object Physics
In order to get a nice render, we need to do some
Material and Texture work on the Cube (Internal
Renderer). With the cube selected, add a Material, set it
to Volume (we're filling the cube- not putting the material
on the surface), and set the Density to 0.000.

With the cube still selected, go to

the Texture panel and add a
texture. Change the Type to Voxel
Data, the Domain Object to
Cube (this object), and Density
under Influence checked and left at 1.000.

In order to animate your smoke scene,

you need to Bake the data. With the
cube still selected, go back to the
physics panel and look at the settings in
the Smoke Cache panel. You can set
the frame start and end for the length.
Finally, hit Bake and let it run. When
finished, you can create an animation
using the same techniques we have in
past chapters. If this panel is grayed
out, it is because you haven't saved
this file yet! Save the Blender file, then
these setting should now be available.

As with all other features we've

covered, there are many other
possible setting that can be
experimented with. For example,
particle settings can be adjusted in
order to change density. You can
also adjust the quality of the smoke
resolution and field weights. Need a
fire ball effect? Try child-parenting a
sphere to your fire ball and use a
smoke system for a nicer effect.
Remember, just like water, all work
must occur inside the domain.

19-7
Chapter
Chapter 1-
19-The Blender
Object Interface
Physics
Dynamic Paint Basics
Dynamic Paint is relatively new to
Blender providing some interesting
effects. It can be used to paint an
object in animations using other
Motion Path
objects or particles as brushes. For this Brush
example, we will create a simple
scene with a Plane and a UV Sphere.
The UV Sphere has been animated Canvas
across the plane. Subdivide the Plane
4-5 times so we have some detail to
paint.

In the Physics panel under Dynamic Paint with the

Plane selected, choose Canvas-Add Canvas. For the
Sphere, add a Dynamic Paint Brush-Add Brush.

Make sure you are painting with a Blue color under the
Sphere's brush settings.

By Pressing Alt-A' or the play button in the bottom time

line, you should be able to see a line painted across
the plane.

You won't be able to see the effect in a

rendered view yet and it would be beneficial
to Bake the animation. Save the file, then
select the Plane. In the Dynamic Paint Cache
panel, select Bake.

In order to see the effect in a rendered view, go to the

Dynamic Paint Output
panel and press the +
by the Paintmap and
Wetmap layers.

Finally, add a Material to the plane, go down to the

Options panel and turn on Vertex Color Paint. You
should now see an animated, rendered view of the
paint effect.

19-8
 Making a Splash With Fluids
Lets make a new Blender file and call it Splash. Start by
deleting the initial cube in the top view and adding a Circle.
Set the circle settings to 15 vertices and click the Fill Type -
Triangle Fan. We will be making a small cup using this circle
and keeping the mesh simple will help with the fluid physics.

Switch to a front view and begin extruding and

scaling the circle to shape a simple cup. When you
reach the top, scale the vertices inward and
shape the interior of the cup. Again, keep the cup
simple so our fluids simulation remains relatively
manageable. After you model the cup, go to the
Modifiers panel and add a Subdivision Surface
modifier, also hit Smooth in the Tool Shelf.

Now its time to add a cube and scale it to

4.00 units using the N key. Center the cube
up around the cup. After adding the cube,
add another UV Sphere and place it above
the cup, but still within the cube. Remember,
all animation must remain within the domain
(cube). Check all views to make sure the
sphere is contained in the cube and over the
cup.

Before we animate, go to the Render panel and change the End Frames of the
animation from 250 to 70. Now, go to the Physics panel and enable Fluids. Set the Cup
as an Obstacle, the Sphere as the Fluid, and the Cube as the Domain. With the cube
selected, press the Bake button and wait for the animation to calculate. After
calculations, press Alt-A to check the animation. If it doesnt work well, hit Ctrl-Z to
get back to the point where you see the cube again and experiment with some of your
settings. If everything worked well, add some nice materials to your objects. Place the
sphere into an unused layer (M key) and Subdivision Surface the water.

** Call the instructor when

finished**

19-9
Chapter
Chapter 1-
19-The Blender
Object Interface
Physics
Realistic Object Interactions in Real-Time and Animations
At one time, all physics interactions had to be accessed from the game engine in
Blender. If you wanted to use the physics interactions in an animation, you had to run
the game engine while you recorded the motion, then go back to the render engine
and finish all work with the animation. You can still do that, but many of the interaction
physics have now been activated in the render engine for easier work. While we will
discuss the basics of object interactions here, we will still discuss the options in the game
engine chapter.

Rigid Body Objects:

For our example, I have set up a simple scene with a Plane, Cube, and Sphere. The
Plane will represent a passive, static ground with the Cube and Sphere set above the
Plane and both set as
active, rigid body actors
that will fall down and
interact with each other and
the plane. Add a Rigid Body
physics modifier to each
object.

For each Rigid Body Type,

select Active for the Cube
and Sphere (make sure the
Dynamic option is
checked) and Passive for
the Plane. If you do not
make the plane Passive, the
objects will fall through the
plane, ignoring it
completely. Press the play button at the bottom of the screen to test your physics. All
objects should react.

In order to adjust your reactions, you will notice

some settings in the Rigid Body Collisions panel.

Mass: The mass of objects affect how they react

with one another, like real life.
Shape: This determine the bounds of the object.
Convex Hull and Mesh will give you the most
accurate results, but may slow animations.
Friction: How much things slide against one another.
Collision Margin: Add a boundary around an object
to help prevent objects passing through each other.
Bounciness: Adds an elasticity to objects, like a
bouncing ball. Bounciness must be set on both
interacting objects to work (ball and plane).
19-10
 Challenge Task: Rube Goldberg Invention
Rube Goldberg was an engineer and cartoonist
that was best known for his imaginative drawings of
elaborate machines that were designed to do
simple tasks.

For this activity, you will create your own

action/reaction system using Blender rigid body
actors. Create a new Blender file called Rube
Goldberg Physics.

Research YouTube for Blender Physics or Bender Rube Goldberg for examples of
what can be done. Your project should consist of at least one ball, one domino
effect, one ramp effect, and some kind of tower. After creating your scene, add
appropriate materials, textures, lighting, and camera
motion. Remember to experiment with the collision
settings of mass, friction,, bounciness,and shape.
Create a 250 frame movie of your project when
finished.

Note: If you want to create more than 250 frame, you

will need to go to the Scene property buttons and
increase the Rigid Body Cache end frame.

Challenge Task:
Try using animated objects that interact in your scene or Rigid
Body Constraints to make a lever!

To create a lever from a cube, scale x,y,z, keeping the pivot

point in the center of the lever. Make a cube stand for the
lever to rest upon. Set the stand as a Passive rigid body and
the lever as an Active rigid body. Add a Hinge Rigid Body
Constraint to the lever. You will need to link the lever to the
stand. Note the names of your meshes. For Object 1, select the Stand mesh. For
Object 2, select the Lever
mesh. Test your system and
adjust as needed.

** Call the instructor when

finished**

19-11
Chapter
Chapter 1-
19The Blender Interface
Reflection
Chapter 19 Reflection and Wrap-up:

The Bullet Physics Engine

You have had some basics experiences in using the powerful Bullet
physic engine in Blender to do some simple tasks. Take a few moments
to reflect on your experiences.

1. We used the cloth physics to create a simple flowing flag. How else could you
possibly use this effect in an animation? Explain your answer and how you would
set up the effect.

2. How did your fluid simulation model turn out? Working with fluid obstacles can be
difficult, requiring some fine-tuning in the settings. Research the internet to find
some examples of how other people have had success with fluids. What did you
find out? Explain.

3. Movies like 2012 used the Bullet engine to make realistic objects falling in the
scenes. Not only are objects set to rigid bodies, but particles effects are added
to simulate dust, smoke, etc. Look for movie physics effect on YouTube. Pay
close attention to special effects. What have you learned so far that could help
you create some of these scenes? Explain.

4. Research the internet for examples where Blender physics have been used. What
future projects do you think you would like to try to create using physics?

19-12
 Chapter 20- Springs, Screws, Gears, & More
So far, we see that Blender has many features that are found in
almost all 3D computer programs like the ability to extrude along
paths, subtract and add meshes through Boolean expressions and
now we will examine revolving-type, or spinning commands. The
commands used for these effects are found in the Tool Shelf and
are visible when in Edit Mode. The Spin and Screw commands can
be used to revolve around a center point with duplicate objects or
smooth spinning. You can also provide an offset that will create a
spiral. The process to get them to work can be confusing to
beginners so we'll create some basic shapes.

Creating Screws and Gears

There are actually mesh add-on tools that can create both of these items easily that will
be discussed later in the chapter, but for now, we will look at the traditional way to
create these items.

Screws and Springs:

In order to make these items, you need a closed shape for the profile (ex. circle or
triangle) and a 2-vertex line that controls the spacing from one coil to the next. We'll
make a screw form for our first example. Start by
adding a Plane. In Edit mode, select the 2 right side
vertices and scale them down to make a triangle
form that will represent the triangle thread. Move
the 3D cursor to the left side and place it where you
want the center of the screw to be.

Now add another plane (while still in edit mode),

delete the 2 right side vertices so that all you have is
a line, and place those 2 vertices on the 3D cursor.
These 2 vertices control the distance between the
coils and must be part of the 1st mesh. If they are not
joined together, use Ctrl-J to join them. My
example has the line the same size as the edge of
the triangle. This means that the threads created will be tight together. If you want
space between the threads, make the line longer. I place these 2 point on the 3D
cursor so it is easier to delete them later. Stay in Edit mode.

Now, use the A key to

select All vertices. The line
and triangle vertices should
all be selected. Make sure
you are in a principle view
since the spinning will occur
related to your view. Select
the Screw command.

20-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
20-The Blender
Springs, Interface
Screws, Gears, & More
When you select the Screw
command, additional options
will display below the Tool Shelf.

Steps will control the quality of

the circular curve (I used 32).

Turns is the number of coils.

Center and Axis will do some

fine-tuning for you.

By spinning the mesh, you will be able to select the string of

vertices created from the line down the center.

In order to make a spring, you do the exact same thing as the screw, except you use a
circle instead of a plane. I will create 2 examples using a short line for close coils and a
longer line for wider coils.

20-2
 Chapter 20- Springs, Screws, Gears, & More
RoboDude Asks: How could I animate a spring stretching and compressing?
Remember how we made shape keys? Scale the shape along the axis and use the
slider to animate it. It can also be parented to an armature bone and stretched.

Gears:
Since a gear uses a 3D shape for the tooth and not just a 2D
profile like screws and springs, we need to use the Spin
command for that and duplicate the object as it is revolved. To
start, add a cube, switch to a front view and shape the one
edge to look like a wedge. I selected the 4 right edge vertices
and hit S to scale and Z to scale on the Z axis only. This is a
pretty simple gear tooth, but good for discussion.

Now move the 3D Cursor to

a location where you would
like the center to be. (still in
the front view). Enter Edit
Mode and select all vertices.
In the Tool Shelf, select the
Spin command. You will
need to adjust:

Steps to match the number

of teeth.
Angle to 360 (full circle).
Dupli may need to be
checked to duplicate
vertices rather than spin
them.

RoboDude Says: After spinning an object, you will probably have a double set of
vertices over the original tooth. Select all vertices and use the Remove Doubles
command in the Tool Shelf.

To finish off the gear, add a cylinder to the center and

shape/scale it to fit the teeth. You could also use
Boolean modifiers to cut holes for more detail. Join the
meshes together when finished.

20-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
20-The Blender
Springs, Interface
Screws, Gears, & More
Creating Revolved Shapes
If you wanted to make a revolved shape, like a goblet or an alien
flying saucer, you could start with a circle and extrude it to make the
shape, but you could also use the Spin command.

For this example, I started with a plane, deleted one vertex, and
shaped/extruded the mesh into the profile of a goblet. Make sure the
3D Cursor is somewhere on the center axis line of the mesh.

Switch to a front view (or whichever

view you need) so you are looking
down at the shape and displays as a
line. Spinning is related to the view
you are working with.

Just like we did for the gear,

make sure all vertices are
selected and hit the Spin
command. You will need to
change the Steps (I used
32), and the
Angle to 360 for
a full circle. You
will also want to
select all vertices
and Remove
Doubles.

To the left is a profile extruded in the top

view. The examples show spinning that
shape in a front view and a side view.
The active view at the time does make a
difference!

Don't forget- there are Modifiers listed that can do some of these features, only a bit
differently. You can actually specify an object for an axis and a few other things. Feel
free to experiment with them now that you have a better understanding of how to do
revolves.
20-4
 Chapter 20- Springs, Screws, Gears, & More
Blender Add-On Meshes
Using the above techniques have always been in Blender and can work well for making
mechanical parts like screws, bolts and gears, but with newer versions, there are now
easier ways to do these things. For the past several releases, there has been a script
included with Blender called Bolt Factory. It worked great for making bolts and nuts, but
many users didn't know it existed. Now, you can have that feature (and others) appear
in the Shift-A add menu by enabling the Add-Ons in the User Preferences menu. This
has been discussed earlier in the book, but here are the details again.

Go to the File pull-down menu and select User Preferences. In there, you will see a
tab called Add-Ons. There are a lot of nice features you may want to use in there
and by checking the box, the script will be enabled. For now, we are checking Add
Mesh- Bolt Factory and Add Mesh-Gears. If you want these enabled at all times,
save the defaults. There are
also many other mesh types
that could be useful in the
Add-Ons. There are now
architectural elements
available as well. These
features are pretty simple
and easy to figure out, but here are the basics:

Bolt Factory:

When you hit Shift-A now, you will

see the 2 new options in the mesh
menu. By selecting Bolt, you will see
a list of options in the Tool Shelf area.
You can select bolt or nut, a preset
metric size, head shape and type,
lengths, etc. Almost everything you
need for quick hardware.

Gears:

There are 2 different types of

gears you can add. A worm
gear and a gear (spur gear).
You have many setting options
that can be changed with
terminology related to real
gear development.

20-5
Chapter 1- The Blender Interface
Turning Gears
Create a worm gear and a spur gear to mesh with each other using the information
discussed in this chapter. You can use the Spin and Screw Tool Shelf commands or
use the Gears Add-On in the User Preferences. Either method, try to keep the gear
teeth equal on each part. Try using the copy command for the basic tooth shape. Add
materials, textures and appropriate lighting. Make a 200 frame animation of the gears
turning. Try to make them mesh perfectly! Remember the Linear Extrapolation options
available in the Graph Editor Window. All you need to do is create a small section of the
animation and let the computer do the rest! If you need a refresher, review the
animation chapter and page 10-9 for animating the light in the lighthouse.

** Call the instructor when finished**

20-6
 Challenge Task: An Animated Spring
Scenario:
You have been asked to develop an animation for a new automotive suspension
system. You can add as much detail as you wish, but need to demonstrate a coil spring
in motion.

Research the internet to find a suspension system you would like to duplicate. Create as
much detail as possible with a spring in the system and animate the system. Animate
the spring using shape keys or armatures as discussed in previous chapters. Here is a
refresher:

Shape Keys:

After creating the spring, go to the Object Data

buttons and create a Shape Key slider. Enter edit
mode, select the top vertices and turn on Proportional
Editing. Scale the selection area to effect all but the
bottom of the spring. Stretch or compress the spring
and exit edit mode. Move the slider and animate to
change the spring. Refer back to previous chapters if
you need assistance.

Armature:

After creating the spring, add an Armature-Single

Bone. Scale the bone so it matches the length of the
spring. Go into Pose Mode for the bone. Child-parent
the Spring to the Bone and choose the parent to Bone
option. Now when you scale the spring on the Z-axis,
you will stretch and compress the spring.

Create a short animation of your scene when finished.

** Call the instructor when finished**

20-7
Chapter
Chapter 1-
20-The Blender Interface
Reflection
Chapter 20 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Mesh Features and Mesh Add-ons

Mesh spin and screw features and modifiers can save you a lot of time
when trying to model spun shapes. So can the mesh add-ons. Take a
few minutes to reflect on your experiences.

1. If you have not done so already, go into Preferences and enable all of the mesh
add-ons. Take a look at all of the different mesh shapes you can add. You have
everything from geometric shapes to pipe joints to torus knots. Which shapes do
you find the most interesting? Which can be the most useful? Why? Explain.

2. Review the architectural meshes that have been recently added to Blender. Find
a YouTube video that demonstrates their use. What could be a good possible use
for these tools for a personal project? Explain.

3. If you were to make gears of different sizes that needed to mesh together
perfectly, how could you do it? If gears are different diameters, are the gear
teeth the same size? Should diameters and number of teeth be proportional?
Research these questions and explain your answers.

20-8
 Chapter 21- Video Motion Tracking
Video Motion Tracking has recently become a strong feature in Blender, giving the
program the ability to rival other professional programs used to create composite CGI
feature films. This feature adds to Blender's ability to be a one-stop-shop for video
creation and editing.

Camera and motion tracking allows you to load video footage of some real-life scene
into Blender, track various points in the scene in Blender, then analyze this tracked data
to turn the movement into a 3D virtual scene. You can now add your own 3D modeled
objects and merge the CGI with the real footage. With practice and patience, you can
create scenes that will rival the Hollywood blockbusters!

Setting Up the Tracking Scene

Getting Started:
The first step is to film the scene you wish to use with your 3D models. Obtain the highest
quality video possible for the best results. Think ahead and plan for lighting,
foreground/background elements, and smooth camera motion. The video will need
several high-contrast points (markers) in the scene that will be used to create the
Blender camera path. Blender will track these point throughout the video in order to
determine the camera's location, target depth, and zoom. If your scene does not have
natural high-contrast points, you may need to add them (small white paper dots on a
dark surface, coins, tape, etc). If you know where your 3D objects will be placed, your
markers can be placed in those locations and be covered by the 3D objects in the final
video.

Blender is able to use many different video formats. Since most phones and digital
cameras use the .mp4 format, Blender is able to use videos in this format. Video quality
that is too poor or with mismatched
frame rates may not work well. It is best
to convert the video to match the size
and frame rate to what you plan to
use for your final composite video
output before tracking the video. This
can be done through a video
converter program or in Blender's
video editor that is discussed in
Chapter 24. For our practice video, we
will use this simple desk scene.

Adding the Video:

After you have your video, open a new Blender file and
change the 3D View window to the Movie Clip Editor
window.

21-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
21-The Blender
Video Interface
Motion Tracking
At the bottom of the window you will see an Open
button. Open your video. It should now display in
the window.
Adjust your End Frame to
match the video length. In
order to play the video, hit
Alt-A or the bottom
Play button. As the
movie plays, you will
notice a small blue bar at
the bottom of the window
with a small lighter blue
area following the marker.
This small area represents
cached frames in
memory. We need to
adjust this so all frames are
cached in memory.

In order to adjust the

cache, go to the File
menu and select User
Preferences. In User
Preferences, go to the
System tab and find
the Memory Cache
Limit setting under
Sequencer at the
bottom of the display.
The default setting is
1024 Megabytes which
only caches about 250-
300 frames. You will
need to adjust this
setting so all frames in
the sequence are
cached for smooth
playback and operation. Try dragging the setting all the way up to the highest limit that
your computer will allow. If you find your computer is sluggish, try adjusting the cache
down until you have as much as needed or try to exit other programs that may be
running on your computer.

By pressing Alt-A or the Play button at the bottom of the screen should now display
the entire bar light blue, indicating that all frames are now cached in memory. It is now
time to start the tracking process.

21-2
 Chapter 21- Video Motion Tracking
Adding and Adjusting Markers:
Markers are used to track the camera motion and can be difficult to adjust. Here are
some of the basics to use when placing markers:

Add Markers- Use this to place a Pattern Window-

marker on a high-contrast area. Shows the pattern
size of the selected
Delete Track- Deletes a marker marker.
Tracking Settings- Adjust
the marker settings. Pattern & Search-
Discussed in the next Check these boxes to
section. display the Pattern and
Search areas of screen.
Track- Use the play arrow
to create a track of the
marker. The Clear button
can be used to clear a
track to try again.
Marker- A marker that is displaying the
Pattern box (the contrast area to track) and
the Search box (the area to search for the
pattern while playing through frames).

By clicking the small triangle in the Tracking Settings box, you will see a few setting you
may need to adjust as you add markers. While most settings should work for most
scenes, results can be improved by changing the following:
Pattern and Search Sizes- The pattern size should be large
enough to cover the entire marker you are using, but not too
large so that it includes a large area around the object. The
search area is where the computer will look for the marker from
frame-to-frame. If you lose the marker when you try to create
the track, try adjusting these. The quality of the movie, contrast
of the marker, and amount of motion will vary for all of these.
Larger pattern and search sizes will slow the system.
Match- Less errors will occur if you change the frame matching
from Keyframe to Previous Frame.

Correlation- Controls how tightly the camera tracks the marker.

The default of 0.750 works for most videos, but can be lowered if
your video quality is poor and has trouble creating a good
track.
Margin- As some of your marker approach the edge of the
frame, they will float at the edge. Try setting the margin to 5 to
prevent errors.

21-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
21-The Blender
Video Interface
Motion Tracking
The more markers you add, the better your camera will track. Not all marker areas may
work well so you will need to experiment with pattern and search sizes for each marker.
Depending on your scene, some markers may go off the screen during the video. This is
fine and will still help create your camera track. The more markers you can create that
remain on the screen during the entire playback, the better. Markers can be moved
and scaled with normal Blender commands (G and S). Remember to use Alt-A to
show animation.

As you add a marker, press the track

selected markers button (triangle) to
record the tracking. If it fails, try adjusting
the marker, clear the track, and track
again. You can clear before or after the
current frame. If you have placed
several markers and want to track them
all at the same time, make sure they are
all selected.
RoboDude Says:
Always make sure you are on frame 1 when adjusting markers! You can also add markers
quickly by pressing Ctrl-LMB in the video window.

Here is our test scene with several markers added and tracked. You will need at least 8
markers for accurate tracking. More is better. If you plan to track an object in the scene
to add CGI to it (like a mask or hat on a person), You will need to track that object as

21-4
 Chapter 21- Video Motion Tracking
well with at least 8 markers. If you go over to the right side of
the screen, you will see an Object panel at the top of the
menu. By default, you have tracked the camera to
determine it's motion. Press the + button to add an object
to track. The Camera tracking markers will disappear so you
can start tracking the object.

It is now time to create the camera path to use with our 3D models.

Exporting the Camera Path Data:

After the points have been tracked, it is now time to set up the
camera data so the path can be exported to your 3D scene.
On the right-hand side of the viewport, you will find the
Camera and Lens settings. You may need to do some internet
research to find some information about the camera used to
create the video. For best results, the Focal Length, Sensor
Width, Pixel Aspect, and Optical Center should be set as
closely as possible to the camera used. There are also several
Camera Presets available to chose from. While Blender
attempts to keep the preset list up-to-date, it is usually running
a model or two behind the current cell phones on the market.

Another setting that you should adjust at this time is in the

Solve panel on the left side of the viewport, second tab down.
Find the two blocks that deal with
Keyframe A and Keyframe B. These
setting are used to tell Blender where there is significant forward
movement in the video. For example, if between frames 65 and
86 the camera operator took 2 steps forward. This should be set
as Keyframes A and B in this panel. This will help Blender
calculate camera position. Scroll through your video to
determine any forward movement. If the camera was used on
a tripod with no forward motion, select that option.

You are now finally ready to press the Solve Object Motion button (also in the Solve
panel) to calculate the camera path. You will see a percentage bar at the bottom of
the viewport as Blender processes the path. After the path is processed, you will notice
a Solve Error message at the bottom right side of the viewport. You goal is to have a
number as low as possible for a high quality motion path. Anything less than 1.00 is
considered excellent while anything less than 3.00 is considered good. This scene shows
an error of 0.7547 which should be good. If the error is very high (3-40 or more), you may
need to check your camera
data settings (focal length and
sensor width) or redo your
markers. It is a process that gets
easier over time and use.

21-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
21-The Blender
Video Interface
Motion Tracking
Using the Camera Path in the 3D Scene:
Now that you have calculated your camera motion, it is time to switch back to the 3D
View window and apply these settings to the camera.

Select the Camera, go to the Constraints panel, and then add a Camera Solver
constraint. You will immediately see points (represented by empties)on the screen that
represent your markers (depends on your Blender version. If not, we will fix that in the
next step) and when playing the animation, your camera will move as the actual
camera did when filming the video. It is now time to refine your scene so it will be easier
to work with 3D elements.

Go back to the Movie Clip Editor window (or split your

screen so you can have a 3D View window and a Movie
Clip Editor window open together). Find the panel on the
left called Scene Setup. By clicking the button Set as
Background, your 3D View window will now display the
video in camera view (0 on number pad). If you do not see
your points in the 3D View, click Setup Tracking Scene. This should display your points
and may also give you a floor plane. By pressing play, the points should align with
where your markers were located in 3D space.

Aligning the Scene:

You now have a camera path and points, but you will
notice that they are not aligned with the grid and a
few points may be higher or lower than the others. To
correct this problem, we need to move the entire
scene to the grid level and align it correctly.

21-6
 Chapter 21- Video Motion Tracking
To align the points (floor) to the grid, you will need to make
some more adjustments in the Movie Clip Editor panel. In the left
panel, close to the Scene Setup options, you will find a panel
called Orientation. We can use these options to align various
points in your 3D scene and also set scale.

Select 3 markers in your scene to use as a floor reference. Select

points that have some distance between them. With those 3
points selected, press the
Floor button in the left
side panel. This will move
the points onto the grid in
the 3D View window. You
can also select a marker
and set as Origin to
center the scene. Points
can also be selected and
set as Wall. Scale can also
be set by selecting 2
points, changing the Distance and pressing the Set Scale button.
RoboDude Says:
It may take a little trial and error to get your scene set up and tracking well. Experiment
using different marker points and scales. Try also setting an origin.

Setting Up Objects for Your Scene:

You are now ready to start adding your 3D objects. If you did not press Setup Tracking
Scene in the previous steps, do so now. By pressing this button, your 3D View window
will now get a plane and cube set along the floor line. These objects will be placed in a
different layer, set as a mask. Basically, objects in this layer do not render, but will
display shadows cast upon
them. This is how your 3D
modeled objects look like
they belong in the actual
scene. Masks and material
settings will be discussed in
the next section. You are
now ready to begin
creating 3D objects in your
scene. Some may be set
to render and some may
mask objects so it looks like
your 3D objects go behind
objects in the video.

21-7
Chapter
Chapter 1-
21-The Blender
Video Interface
Motion Tracking
Using Masks and Materials

When you added the

tracking scene, Blender placed the plane into the bottom
layer. It did this because Bender set that layer up as a masking
layer and also considers it a Background layer in node
rendering. Basically, anything placed into that layer will not
render. You can see this by going into the Render Layers
properties panel.

Creating masking objects that receive shadows using the

internal render engine materials is a simple process. For the
example below, in the tracking plane that was added as our
floor, I create a hole by subdividing the plane, deleting some
vertices, then reshaping the hole to look more jagged. A material was added to the
plane. In the material
Shadow panel near the
bottom, The only items
needing checked are
Receive to receive shadows
from other objects, and
Shadows Only so the only
thing the plan displays in the
rendered view are those
shadows it has received.

You will notice that a model of

the milk carton and other
objects were created to match
the items in the video as closely
as possible. These objects are
being used as masks so if the
monkey head passes behind
one of them, it blends perfectly
with the scene, making it
difficult to tell what is real and
what is CGI, as displayed to the
left.

21-8
 Composite Desk Scene
Scenario:
You have been hired to work on a soft drink commercial requiring a CGI video using a
real desk scene. Your goal is to create a 300 frame movie (10 seconds @ 30 fps)using
camera motion tracking.

For this project, create a Blender file called Motion Tracking, using your standard
video default settings. Your steps are:

Create a 10 second video of a desk scene, or use an instructor provided video.

Convert the video to match your final output settings.
Create your tracking scene in Blender. Research your camera's settings for
accuracy.
Develop your 3D models, materials, lighting, and appropriate masks for your
video.
Save a 10 second video of your final work.

** Call the instructor when finished**

21-9
Chapter
Chapter 1-
21The Blender Interface
Reflection
Chapter 21 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Is it real or is it CGI?
Adding realistic-looking 3D elements to a real video is common place in
movies, TV shows and advertisements these days. So much so, that it is
becoming impossible to tell the difference. Many of the car
commercials you see today use 3D models of cars instead of the real
thing, but you can't tell the difference. Please take a few minutes to reflect on your
experiences with motion tracking.

1. After creating a simple motion tracking scene, what were your biggest
challenges and how did you overcome them? Explain.

2. What did you find to be the most interesting aspects of this project and why?
Explain.

3. Research the internet to find some examples of motion tracking. What would you
like to attempt to do with motion tracking in a possible future project? Why?

4. Find the Blender Open Movie Tears of Steel on the internet. Tears of Steel was
developed by the Blender foundation to highlight development of the motion
tracking tools. Which features of the movie did you find to be the most interesting
and realistic? Which ones seemed like a low-budget sci-fi movie effect (cheesy
or not very realistic)? Explain your answers.

21-10
 Chapter 22- Game Engine Basics
So how can you make 3D games with Blender? Also considered real-time animation,
the game engine has been around for many years and uses the Bullet physics engine
like all of the other physics animation tools previously discussed. Even though we have
already discussed using the Rigid Body physics in animation, the physics in the game
engine actually give you some more options, plus having the ability to control those
objects through logic blocks. The Blender game engine uses a programming language
called Python. Can you make nice games in Blender without knowing Python? The
answer is yes, but if you want to reach a more professional level, knowing Python is a
definite. There is a lot of nice documentation on the web for learning Python.
Top View
Setting Up The Physics Engine
Let's say you want to use physics to make a ball bounce realistically
using tools similar to what we used in chapter 19. The 1st thing you need
to do is set up the scene. For my sample scene, I have created a UV
Sphere a few Blender units above a plane in a front view. Remember
that this scene will be using gravity and reactions. If you make your
scene in the top view laying flat, it will work just like real life.

It's now time to set up the real-time animation. The real-time game
engine in Blender has changed quite a bit over the years. Here's what Front View
you need to do:
To enable the Game Engine
physics, go to the top bar
and find the box for the Render Engine.
Change it from Blender Render to Blender
Game. This switches many of your property
tool panels to game engine options. We are interested in settings in 3 of these panels:

Physics Panel:

In the Physics panel, you control the Actors in your real-

time animation. By default, everything is Static (unlike
using Rigid Body object in the render engine, where
nothing is set as passive by default), meaning that it
doesn't react to the physics settings except to have
things bounce off them. They can still do things when
logic blocks are applied to them, but do nothing
otherwise. The other 2 main types we will discuss later
are Dynamic and Rigid Body actors. When set to
rigid body, it will act similar to objects discussed in
chapter 19.You can also make something invisible here.

Two other important settings are Radius which

controls the actor size and Collision Bounds which sets
the shape of the actor. All of this will be addressed later.

22-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
22-The Blender
Game Interface
Engine Basics
World Panel:

The most important setting for the game in this panel is

the Gravity. By default, it is set to real gravity, but
what if you want to make a game set in space where
gravity isn't an issue? You will want to set gravity to zero
or something really low. This is where you can set the
speed of the game (FPS) along with other typical
settings that work in the game like Horizon color or even
a mist.

Render Panel:

Just like rendering a picture to see your output, this

is where you enable the game to play. You can
press the Start button here or just press P to
play in a viewport.

Your end result of making a game is for that game

to be played as a standalone (not in Blender). This
means saving the game as an executable that
can launch itself, free of Blender. You can set the
size of the game, the color depth, Frames-per-
second (FPS), and full screen effects.

There are also many other settings here that deal

with the shading engine used, how lights and
shadows are displayed, and more.

While not in this panel, but the Scene panel,

games rely heavily on sound effects, the game
engine has setting features that deal with how the
sound is played as well.

22-2
 Chapter 22- Game Engine Basics

It's now time to apply some physics to the

sphere. Add a Cone to the scene so the ball
has something to deflect off of as it falls.
Switch to a shaded view and select the UV
Sphere. Rotate your view slightly so you can
see what happens when we apply the
physics. You want to see the ball drop and
how it drops. Now go to the Physics panel so
we can change some setting.

Change the Physics Type to

Dynamic. If you are in
wireframe mode and scaled
the sphere down in size, you will
see a dashed circle around it.
This circle represents the actual
size of the actor. You will need
to change the Radius setting
to match the size of the sphere.
If this circle is larger than the
sphere, when you play the
physics, the ball will hover over
the plan and never touch it.

RoboDude Says: The game engine likes actors (radius) to be a size of one
whenever possible. If you scale it down and also scale the radius circle to match, it
may still not work correctly. Pressing Ctrl-A and applying a reset to the Scale and
Rotation can usually correct this problem.

It's now time to test out the system. Switch back

Solid display mode. With your cursor in the 3D
viewport window, press P to put Blender into
game play mode. The ball should fall and hit the
cone, but it probably won't act quite right.
Depending on where you placed the cone, it may
even balance on the top of it! If that happens,
move the cone slightly to one side and try again.
The ball hits the cone, then slides down. It doesnt
rotate like a real ball. To exit game play, hit Esc.

Dynamic and Rigid Body Actors:

A Dynamic actor allows you to use physics on it and can fall, bounce and be pushed
by forces, but not act like a true solid (rigid) body. These actors are great for games

22-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
22-The Blender
Game Interface
Engine Basics
where you need to drive or run around in a maze or other scene. A Rigid Body actor will
behave like a real solid body, as we experienced already in chapter 19. It will spin and
deflect when it collides with other objects. Good for some things in the game engine,
but better for creating animations like a brick wall collapsing and things bouncing
around.

Now change the sphere into a Rigid Body

actor and hit P to test out the system
again. The ball should now roll off the plane
and fall into nothingness. Press Esc to exit.
Feel free to experiment with some of the
other setting like Mass. Just like real life, if 2
objects collide with different masses, one will
feel the effect more than the other.

Since you are working with a sphere, you don't notice that
even though we are using a rigid body, the actor physics
are still calculating to the Radius setting in the Attributes. If
you were to delete the sphere and use a Cube instead, it
would roll off the plane like the sphere did. To fix this, you
need to turn on Collision Bounds, as mentioned in
chapter 19, and choose a bounds option. Box would be
good for a cube mesh while Convex Hull or Triangle
Mesh would be better for a more complex shape. You
would need to experiment to see which works best for
your model.

As you watch your physics in action, you may notice some

other reactions that seem a bit off. For example, the ball
may slide a bit, or not enough. It may not bounce much or
it may spin too much, or not enough. We have 2 places
where we can control some of these factors. The first
place is in the Physics panel. You will find a block for
Dampening. The Translation slider controls the amount
of sliding in a
direction (like being on ice) while the
Rotation slider controls resistance to spinning.
These 2 features will be discussed more when
we talk about making a game.
RoboDude Asks: Why does Convex Hull work better for some meshes while Triangle
mesh works better for others?
Convex Hull basically takes the outline of your mesh while Triangle Mesh will closely
follow the mesh vertex shape. With any 3D game, you will need to keep your
physics as simple as possible to keep it playing smoothly. Triangle Mesh will provide
more accurate collisions, but at a cost in processing. How good does it need to
be?

22-4
 Chapter 22- Game Engine Basics
The second place to make changes to reactions is in
the Materials panel. Add a material to the sphere. And
find the Physics settings. If you want something to
bounce, adjust the Elasticity slider, Friction controls
slippage. You can also provide forces and other
dampening here as well. For these to work properly,
you usually need materials set on both interacting
objects (ex. Elasticity on both the sphere and the
plane).

Materials in the Game Engine:

Some things that work in rendering do not work in the
game engine while other features do. For example, a
standard image texture may display in the game
engine, but many adjustments to that texture may not
work. There has been a lot of development in texture
work for the game engine and we will examine some of that in the UV mapping
chapter. For now, just work with straight Diffuse material color.
To see what things will look like in a game, change your view
type from Solid shading to Textured shading. Press P and
your view will reflect what will be seen in a saved game. Since
the next section deals with applying game physics to an actual
saved animation, texture can be handled exactly as we have
in previous chapters.

Using Game Physics in Animation

So far, you have a ball dropping on a cone and rolling off the plane. It works when you
press P to enable the game engine, but what if you want to use this reaction in a
movie? If you press Alt-A to play an animation, nothing happens. That is because the
reaction has not been written into an animation curve...
yet. This is an alternate way to save a physics reaction to
the methods discussed in chapter 19 in the Rigid Body
physics section.

Writing the game physics to an animation curve is a

simple process. In order to write to a curve, go to the
Game pull down menu and select the Record
Animation option. This will enable the game record
feature. Now, press P to run the game engine. Let the
physics run through, then
Esc the game engine. Go back to the Game menu
and turn Record Animation off. You should also change
the Engine back to Blender Render. You can now test
and adjust your newly saved physics as standard animation
curves and keys.

22-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
22-The Blender
Game Interface
Engine Basics
Let's see if it recorded the animation. Switch your screen
layout to Animation. You should see animation curves in
the Curve Editor window.
Press Alt-A to confirm
the animation. You can
now work with your
scene exactly as you
would for any other
animation work including
materials and textures.

RoboDude Says: Remember to TURN OFF the Record Animation feature after you
have recorded your motion. If you leave it on and accidentally press P again, it
will try to over write your saved animation curves!
The only problem you may encounter when saving a movie file will involve the speed of
the animation. The physics may be run slow in the final movie. This can be corrected in
several ways.

Method #1: Remap the timing in the Render panel.

Find the Old and New mapping settings. If you need the
movie to run twice as fast, set New map to 50 (50%) and adjust
your end frame to half. If you need it to run slower, like speed,
try a new map of 200 and double your end frame.

Method #2: Scale Keys

in the Dope Sheet.
Another method is to select All keys in the
Dope Sheet window and Scale them in the
X axis (S to scale and X- drag the
mouse).

Using Logic Blocks

We have talked about using the physics for animation, but now it's time to look at using
Blender for Real-Time animation like an architectural walk-through and yes, games.

Scene Set Up:

Start a new scene and make a Cube resting on a
plane. Using the N key to open the Transform bar,
change the scale X of the Cube to 0.200. We'll use this
as a wall block. For the Plane, scale the X and Y to
10.000. This will be our floor.

22-6
 Chapter 22- Game Engine Basics

Now add a UV Sphere, enter Edit Mode and select a single vertex
from the top view as shown. Use the G key to pull it out from the
sphere. This will indicate the forward direction when we
turn this into an actor and move it around with the arrow
keys. Make sure that it is above and not touching the
plane. This could cause it not to work when we turn it into
an actor.

We now have a basic scene to work with. Add a

Material to each object and change the Diffuse
color for each so they stand out. You should
have something like this scene.

Setting the Actor:

It's now time to turn the Sphere into a Dynamic
Actor. Start by setting the Engine from Blender
Renderer to Blender Game (page 22-1). Go to
the Physics panel and select Dynamic for they
type. To keep the actor from
sliding or spinning too much in
the game, we'll set Translation
Dampening up to 0.400 and Rotational Dampening up to 0.900. You
may need to experiment with these later, but these settings should be
good. If these settings are too low, you will notice that your actor
coasts a lot after you take your finger off the key. This is also
controllable in the materials settings with friction.

We shouldn't need to change the radius size since we didn't scale the
sphere, but if you did, adjust the radius size to match, then hit Ctrl-A
to reset scale and rotation settings.

It's now time to switch to the Game Logic screen layout so we

can add some controllers.

Game Terminology:

If you have worked with other game design software (we use GameMaker Studio for
our 2D game design needs), you will start to see similarities between many of the
programs. For example, GameMaker uses Events and Actions to control objects. An
event can be something like a collision with another object or pressing a key on a
keyboard or mouse. For every event, there can be many actions, like playing a sounds,
moving in a direction, playing an animation, or shooting at something. As you work
through Blender logic blocks, think of Blender Sensors like Events, and Actuators like
Actions. This cross logic will help you see the common factors between programs.

22-7
Chapter
Chapter 1-
22-The Blender
Game Interface
Engine Basics
Logic Block Construction:
Now that you've switched to the Game Logic screen layout, you will see the logic block
window at the bottom. Think of this as an Input-Process-Output model, but called
Sensor-Controller-Actuator. You will also see a place to add a Property.

There are a lot of different types of sensors, controllers and actuators that you can use,
more than we will discuss here. After you get a feel for working with this chapter, there
are many discussions and examples on the internet addressing practical examples of all
these. To get started, lets add a Keyboard sensor, a Add controller, and a Motion
actuator.

First thing, connect the blocks by dragging a line. To disconnect the, drag backwards.

The first thing we want to do is make the sphere move forward

when we hit the Up arrow key. Click in the box by the word Key.
It will say Press a key. Hit the Up arrow key to assign it. There
are other options, but we do not need them for this exercise.

Think of the Controller as the computer processor. By default,

we hit And, meaning that if we tie more than 1 sensor to it, all
sensors must be in a true state in order for an actuator to
function. There are other expression available in the controller.

The Motion actuator works for dynamic and static objects. When moving a Static
object, you will want to use the Loc and Rot motion
outputs. You are setting a step movement or rotation. You
probably do not want to use these for Dynamic actors! If
you do, an actor might walk right through a wall. Think of
this as real life. To move a Dynamic object, it needs a push
(Force) or turning force (Torque). You will see columns for
X,Y, and Z. Let's set the Y Force to 5.00. Hit P to test out
your scene. Adjust the force if more or less is needed. If it
goes the wrong direction, try a negative number or try the
X column. Adjust actor Dampening to improve stopping.

22-8
 Chapter 22- Game Engine Basics
Now that you have the sphere moving forward, add more sensors, controllers and
actuators to make it move backwards. In my case, all I would need to do is give it a Y
force of -5.00 (or any speed you wish). To make it turn, you will need to apply a Torque
in the Z column. A Torque of 1.00 may be enough If not, try higher. You should now have
4 directional keys for the sphere. It's also a good
idea to name your sensors. You may have a lot of
them. You can also collapse them by clicking the
small triangle.
RoboDude Asks: Having trouble with the sphere rolling strangely when moving
forward? Try going to the Materials panel and reducing the Friction of the sphere
or floor (page 21-4). If your actor spins when it his the wall, also lower friction for
the wall.
Your logic layout should look something like this:

Named Collapsed
Sensors Panels

Let's add a Jump command using the Space Bar. Since you want him to jump and not
fly, we will need to connect 2 Sensors to a Controller to make this work. One Keyboard
sensor for the space bar and one Collision sensor with a named Property.
Select the Floor plane and add a Game Property
(found to the left of the logic blocks). Give it a
name called floor. This is case sensitive.

Now go back and select the Sphere and add a Sensor-Controller-Actuator. Make the
sensor a Keyboard and assign the Space Bar. Use an And controller and a Motion
actuator. Give it a Force in the Z-direction of 100. Since the force will only be applied
momentarily when in contact with the floor, it will need to be high in order to have a
good jump. Now, we need to add another Sensor and make it Collision. In the Property
block, type floor. Tie this sensor to the same controller as the keyboard for jump.
Because it is an And
controller, both sensor
states must be true in
order for the actor to
jump. Adjust the force.

22-9
Chapter
Chapter 1-
22-The Blender
Game Interface
Engine Basics
Using Animation in a Game:
Now that we have basic motion down, let's try an animation
in the game. We will make the Cube act like a rising door
when the actor gets close to it. We first need to add some
animation keys to the cube. With the Cube selected and at
Frame 1, hit I to insert a Location key. Move up to Frame
60, raise the cube high enough for the actor to pass under it
and hit I again to insert another Location key. If it helps,
change back to the Animation or Default screen layout
during this step, then return to the Game screen.

Back in the Game window

layout, select the Sphere and
give it a Property. Name it something like player

Select the Cube once more and add a Sensor-Controller-Actuator to it. This time, you
will add a Near sensor, And controller, and an Action actuator. Set is up as shown:

Actor's
Flipper Action
Property Name
for Animation
instead of Play
Distance-Reset:
Start-End Frames:
Adjust for actor distance when trigger is
Set these numbers to match the range of
activated. The reset distance (usually
frames you wish to play during the action.
higher than distance) resets the trigger.
Also add the CubeAction.
When the actor with the property name player gets within the sensor's trigger
distance, the actuator occurs. There are several different playing options in the Action
actuator- Play plays the frames and stops; Ping-Ping plays frame forwards and
backwards; Flipper plays forward, stops, then plays backwards during the trigger reset;
and Loop occurs the entire time when activated.

These are just the basics of the Game Engine. With practice, experimentation, and a
little research, you will be able to build some amazing games. Games are played
through the camera's view so you will want to set the camera's location or child-parent
it to the Actor. When you're ready to test the game outside of Blender, you need to
enable exporting through the User Preferences in the File menu. Go to Add-Ons and
select Game Engine:Save As Run time. Now go to File-Export and save as a .exe file.

RoboDude Says: When making a game, try to keep face counts on meshes as low
as possible. The game must actively count and deal with the faces in a game.
Detailed meshes will slow things down considerably. The best way to simulate
detail is through detailed textures, which will be discussed in the next chapter.

22-10
 A Simple Maze Runner
For this activity, your job is to design a maze full of motion. Create an actor that can be
moved around with the arrow keys as discussed in the previous pages. To create the
maze, start with a plane and scale it large enough to make a nice sized maze.
Subdivide the plane as shown below, making sure the grid blocks are a little larger than
your actor:

Switch from Vertex select

to Face select in the lower
bar and press A to
deselect all faces.

Using the Circle selection

method (C key), Select
all of the faces you wish
to use as walls.

Now, switch to a front view and Extrude the walls

up a few grid blocks. Switch to Wireframe view as
well to help with the next selection.

Using Box selection (B key), select the walls from the front
view, being careful not to window down too far to catch the
floor. Press P to separate the Selection.

Add Materials to both the floor and walls, place your actor in a good starting location,
child-parent the Camera to the Actor and place the camera directly above the actor
for a first-person view of the maze.

Challenge Task:
Add a door with
animation that rises when
the actor approaches it,
steps, trap doors, etc. to
make it interesting. We
will be discussing textures
in the next chapter.

** Call the instructor when

finished **

22-11
Chapter
Chapter 1-
22The Blender Interface
Reflection
Chapter 22 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Real-Time Animation and Game Design

Not only can the game engine be used to make games, but imagine
making interactive architectural designs where the client can move
around the building in real-time to any place in the structure, or making
virtual tours of famous historical places. Now imagine using your designs
with a virtual reality headset or a simulator. Take a few moments to reflect on your
learning.

1. What did you find to be the most challenging aspect of this unit? Explain.

2. 3D games lend themselves best to first-person style games. Now that you have
experienced some of the basics of 3D game development, how has this
experience changed your ideas of how 3D games are created? Explain.

3. Trying to find a balance between keeping the game running smoothly vs making
the characters and scenes as detailed as possible is always a concern for game
makers (mesh detail, texturing, lighting, actions, etc.) How do you think they find
that balance? Feel free to research the topic of how to successfully design 3D
games on the internet. What did you find out? Explain.

4. Explore the various sensors and actuators in the game engine and research how
a few of them operate. What new and interesting features did you discover?
Explain.

22-12
 Chapter 23- UV Texture Mapping
Since games need to be able to process operations as fast as possible, traditional
rendering techniques (specular, ray tracing reflections and refractions) cannot typically
be processed fast enough for a game. For this reason, textures need to be mapped
differently. There are also times when you may want to use mapped textures in an
actual render. Blender does this through traditional UV Texture Mapping and a new
system called GLSL Shading. There is a lot that can be done through both of these
methods beyond the basics that will be discussed here. For more details, check out
the Blender wiki.

UV Texture Mapping
Think of UV Mapping like taking a box and cutting it to lay flat. The texture needs to
match each side of the box. It is difficult to do that with traditional materials and
textures. Let's say you want to model a dinosaur. The texture changes
on various parts of his body and need to be mapped correctly. This is
where UV Mapping come into play. For this example, I am going to
map the following texture I made in GIMP on a basic cube:
This is just a jpeg image that would be impossible to map as a
standard material/texture.

To begin, start with a basic scene with a cube and

change your viewport shading type from Solid to
Textured. This is the shading used during game play. You
will notice that, by default, textures are
effected by the lighting so add some lights to illuminate your scene
better and switch to the UV Editing window layout. This will give you
one 3D viewport and one UV Editor viewport. At
the bottom of the UV Editor viewport, hit the
Image-Open Image menu option and find the
texture you wish to use.

Now, enter Edit Mode for the cube and switch to selecting Vertices to Faces since this is
a face applying process. You can select individual faces and put UV textures on that
way, but let's Unwrap the cube to match our texture. This can be done for any mesh,
but we need to mark the seams where we want a split to occur. If we
look at the picture, we can see where seams should go. In order to
mark seams, we
need to switch
from Face select to Edge select.

Select the following edges (Shift-

RMB) and click Mark Seam in the
Shading/UVs tab section in the Tool
Shelf. These will be the unfold edges.
It should match the box layout.

23-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
23-The
UVBlender
Texture Interface
Mapping
Now go back to Face select mode, hit A for All twice to select all
faces. Type U to bring up the UV Mapping options in the 3D window.
You have several option. We want Unwrap. You will now see the
unwrapped faces in the UV Mapping window. You can select these
vertices as you would for any other Blender
object and move, scale or rotate them. You
will also see the texture on the cube. By
pressing P you will see the texture in game
play. (in object mode) Adjust the vertices so
it looks good on the cube.

UV Textures in an Animated Movie:

Just like game physics can be written into an animation curve, UV can be used with
materials and textures. After going through the steps above, add a material and
texture to the object in the Internal Renderer.
Select Image or Movie for the texture type.
Select the picture you used in the Image panel (it will be
listed un the drop-down. You will not need to go out and
open it from your folder again).
Under the Mapping panel, choose UV in the
Coordinate box. Pressing F12 should give you a rendered
image of the map.

UV in Cycles:
This is the same as applying an
image texture as discussed
before with only a few
adjustments. After creating the
unwrapped UV map, go to
Cycles Materials panel, use a
Diffuse node, set Color to
Image Texture, Select the
image from the
drop down option,
and set Vector to
UV.

23-2
 Chapter 23- UV Texture Mapping
GLSL Shading
GLSL shading is relatively new to Blender and is an area seeing a great deal of
development. It is an attempt to add many rendering-like features to the game engine,
adding to a more realistic environment. As with the UV Mapping section, this unit will
only cover the basics to get you started.

Not all video cards are supported for GLSL shading. Some machines will be unable it
use this feature. See the Blender wiki for current specification.

To get started, we'll start a new scene and split the viewport, setting
one to UV/Image Editor.
Set the Engine to
Blender Game and
viewport shading to
Textured. The last thing
you need to do is switch from Multitexture to GLSL shading in the
Render panel. You are now ready to work with the GLSL features in
the game engine. Not all texture and shading features are available
in GLSL, but many are and others are being developed constantly.
As mentioned before, we will only be looking at some of these
features.

Adding Textures:
Basically, to add textures for the game in GLSL, you need to add
materials and textures the way you do for any movie in the internal
render engine. For my example, I am working with a plane for the
ground and a cube. I've added a material and texture to the floor,
using a stone texture. The stones are too large so I need to repeat
it a bit in the texture panel. You can't use the X and Y Repeat in
the Image Sampling panel, but can change the size in the
Mapping panel.

The cube was a bit more difficult. Because the

texture wants to map as Flat by default and
GLSL does not currently work with
changing the mapping to Cube, I
had to apply the texture as we did
in the previous section using UV
Texture Mapping and mapping the texture to each face.
Remember to also switch the Mapping in the Textures
panel to UV.

Another nice feature with GLSL is

the ability to show Normal
Geometry to give a texture depth.
Looks best with a higher Specular.
23-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
23-The
UVBlender
Texture Interface
Mapping
Shadows in GLSL:
Another nice effect allowed in GLSL is the ability to cast shadows in game play. Right
now, ray tracing is not supported so your only option is to use a Spotlight with a Buffer
Shadow setting (refer to the lighting chapter for more details on setting the buffer
shadow).

Currently, there is a lot of development in GLSL with new features constantly being
added. There is also a lot of work in Baking settings to improve performance. There is
work on support for indirect lighting, fluids, soft bodies and many more. For up-to-date
information, follow the Blender wiki, YouTube, and the forums.

World Settings:
While some World settings work in Multi-texture
mode and some work on GLSL Shading, Some
features do not work in either at the time (stars
for example). In Multi-texture shading, you can
get a nice effect with the Mist settings to give a
foggy feel to your game, but works a bit
differently in GLSL. World Horizon and Zenith
colors work differently as well.

23-4
 Creating a Texture Wrap
Scenario:
You work for an advertising firm and have been asked to create a commercial
featuring your client's new cereal brand. Create a table scene featuring the product.

Using the UV texture mapping features, create your

scene. Search the internet for an unwrapped box
pattern of your favorite cereal to use or scan your own
box. Here is the texture used in this example:

Create your box from a cube, apply the UV texture

maps, and add other elements to your scene.

Rather than trying to unwrap

the entire box, try selecting a
single face to unwrap using
the U command in edit
mode. You will have a single
face with corner vertices in
the image mapping window
to work with. Move those
points around to match the
side you want to use. You
may also need to rotate the
face. Continue until finished.

Add other elements to

your scene to make it look
nice and realistic. Add
appropriate lighting and
set a good camera angle.
Render and save an
image of your work.

** Call the instructor when finished **

23-5
Chapter 1- The
Challenge TaskBlender Interface
& Chapter 23 Reflection
For your challenge task, open your maze game file. Add appropriate UV textures to the
elements in your game. Add a world that uses mist in your maze for a dreary effect. Feel
free to add and texture any other elements you wish.

** Call the instructor when finished **

Chapter 23 Reflection and Wrap-up:

UV Texture Mapping
UV maps are used in most professional movies and advertisements.
Please take a few moments to reflect on these questions.

1. Take a look at a 3D animated animal (bird, dinosaur, etc.). Look at the variations
in the texture of the animal. Why would it be difficult to get a texture to map
correctly using the traditional image texturing in Cycles and the internal render
engines discussed earlier in the book? Why would UV mapping be better?
Explain.

2. Research the internet for how you would unwrap an animal, like a dinosaur, and
UV texture it in Blender. What did you find? Explain the process.

23-6
 Chapter 24- Video Sequence Editor
We've come to the second to the last chapter of the book ( the last chapter deals with
3D printing) and what better way to end this introduction to Blender than to compile all
of your work into a final movie. While you can compile your video in programs like
Adobe Premiere or Windows Movie Maker, Blender has it's own movie editor that is
quite functional. Combine the Video Editor with Nodes and you have everything you
need to make a professionally edited movie with sound, right inside Blender.

Compiling Your Clips and Images

Think of all the work you've done in Blender. You probably have a lot of short movie
clips and saved images. Let's put them into a movie. Most movies start with a black
screen. To handle this, I typically insert a picture that has been saved as just a black
filled image.

First thing, set up your scene for your final movie output. Blender can only compile
sounds into an MPEG movie (due to open source issues). This is actually great because
mpeg2 movies output high quality and are DVD-ready. The settings are just a review of
what we have done in previous chapters. If you need a review, look at page 7-3.

The only thing new is that you need to make sure the
Sequencer box is checked in Post Processing.
Without this being checked when you hit Animate
Blender will only animate the 3D scene and not the
sequence. For best results, always animate at the
same size and frame rate- mismatched sizes and rate
could cause output problems.

Now, switch the screen layout to Video Editing.

Here is a look at the screen layout:

F-Curve Animation
Window Preview
Window

Transform
Tracks for Videos, Images, Sounds and Properties
Transitions Window

24-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
24-The Blender
Video Interface
Sequence Editor
Let's start by adding 2 images to our time line. We'll add a Black
screen image and a saved image of out Lighthouse. To do this,
click the Add button at the bottom of the window and select
the Image option. You can add Effects, Sounds, Images,
Movies and Scenes. Browse to your saved images. My 1 st image
will be a black screen. It doesn't matter which track you drop it
into, but I usually work with the bottom tracks for images and
movies. Place the track to start at Frame 1. Items placed in the time
line can be selected and moved using standard Blender commands
(G key). You can also zoom and pan in the tracks. By default, my
image came in only 25 frames long- not even a second. This is where
you need to get a feel for how long an image should be displayed. I want my black
screen to last for 2 seconds plus 1 second for the fade transition. This would be a total of
3 seconds, or 90 frames. To lengthen an
image, RMB click on the end of the strip. Only
the end frame of the strip will highlight and you
can stretch it with the G key. You will also
notice that the numbers along the bottom of
the window represent seconds. Only images can be stretched, videos cannot. They will
give the appearance of being lengthened, but only the first or last frame will show
longer.

It's now time to add the second image. Go to the Add button
again and find the next Image. Place it on the track above the
first one and overlap it about 1 second for the transition.

If you grab the green bar on the time line tracks

(represents current frame) you can drag it with the LMB
as you watch the Preview Window. You can scroll the
mouse wheel in the Preview Window if you need to zoom
in or out. You should notice a switch from black screen to
the rendered lighthouse. Right now, it is an abrupt
change. We want a smooth cross fade.

To add a Cross Fade, you need

to select Both tracks that you
wish to cross with the LMB while
holding Shift (standard Blender multiple selection command )
It is important that you select the image that appears first in
time (black image), then the second. Otherwise, the cross will
work backwards. With both selected, go to the Add menu,
Effect Strip and choose Cross. Place it in the track above
the two. There are many options for different effects.

Now when you scrub the time line with your mouse or press the play button (or Alt-A),
you should see a smooth transition.

24-2
 Chapter 24- Video Sequence Editor
More About Transitions:
While many other video editors give you more transition options than Blender ( star
bursts, spirals, etc.), Blender has what most people need for professional production. A
Cross or Wipe. When you watch a movie, most scene usually just
cut from one clip to another or fade (cross) to the next scene.
Sometimes, you will see a wipe or iris effect, which Blender can
do. If you add a Wipe from the Effects Strip menu, you can
scroll down through the Transform Properties window on the right
to see your options. The current options are:

Transition Type: Select Clock, Iris, Double, or Single to show

the type of transition effect.

Direction: Controls the direction of effect (up/down,

left/right, in/out, clockwise/counter-clockwise).

Blur Width: Does the effect have a sharp edge or blurred?

Angle: Horizontal, vertical, or other angle of wipe.

Adding Movies:
Now it's time to add a movie. Follow the same steps as before, but select Movie from
the Add menu. When the movie come into your
tracks, it will also contain an Audio track, represented in
green (even if your video contains no audio ). You can
delete this upper track if desired. Place the movie and
add a transition as before. K Knife Cut

If you need to shorten a movie track, you can

select the end and shorten it, like we did to
lengthen an image, or you can place the green
current frame bar at the desired cut location,
select the clip and hit K for knife cut. The movie is split at that point.

When taking videos with phones and cameras, it may be difficult to

keep your image sizes the same. Meaning, when they are brought
into the video editor, they may be stretched to fit the Blender output
dimensions. To correct this problem, images and movies can be
cropped in the Transform Properties window by checking the Image
Crop box. Simple adjust as needed.

RoboDude Says: It is best to work with movie files that have all been rendered
at the same size and frames-per-second. Problems may occur when Blender
tries to convert files that are different from the output you have selected.

24-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
24-The Blender
Video Interface
Sequence Editor
More about Effect Strips:

So far, we've used the most common type of effects- a Cross and Wipe. Blender has
several other useful effects in the Effects Strip menu. Here are a few:

Alpha Over/Under: If you have an image or image

strip that has a transparency channel, like a title
overlay, you an use these effects to do composite
work. Just place the image over the movie strip,
select both tracks, then add an Alpha Over or
Under effect to combine them. The example to the
right shows a text image with transparency placed
over another image.

Text:
New to Blender is the Text effect strip. This will allow you to add simple
text overlays on your time line without having to create them in another
graphics program, like GIMP. Options are limit at the time of this writing,
but I expect the text command will grow in future releases. Currently,
you cannot change the font and animating effects (i.e. changing the
size or location of the text over time) are rough, but there are many
other settings. You can change position and alignment, size, and add a
shadow. You can also add Strip modifiers in the Transform Properties
window to change brightness, color, and contrast.

Speed Control:
If you place a movie into your sequence that runs too fast or too slow, you can select
that movie and add a Speed Control effect strip to the movie to change the speed.
Select the end of the movie after adding the Speed Control and simple move it. The
movie will stretch or shrink.

Finishing Your Video Tracks:

Continue to add images, clips,
and transitions to finish the video
part of your project. Sticking to
the bottom tracks keeps your
project looking clean. I usually
alternate between 2-3 tracks.
Don't forget to match your End
frame to the end of your movie.

RoboDude Asks: When I press the Play button or press Alt-A, why doesn't my
movie play through? Check the End Frame of your movie- you probably need to
adjust it.

24-4
 Chapter 24- Video Sequence Editor
Adding an Audio Track
Adding an audio track isn't much different from adding images and movies. Many
different audio track formats are accepted by Blender and the most common are WAV
and MP3 files. Some files may need to be converted through an audio converter, many
free on the internet. There have been some helpful upgrades to working with audio in
the sequence editor. To add an audio file, go to the Add menu and select Sound.
Find your file and add it to an upper track. Trimming
an audio track is accomplished the same way you
cut or shorten a movie or image. ( grabbing the end
or using the K knife tool ). To help you find a more
exact point, you can zoom in on the audio track and
see the waveform after checking the Draw
Waveform box in the Transform Properties.

With an audio track selected, look at the options to the

right. The most important options are displayed at the
bottom. You can Pack a sound into the Blender file and
adjust it's Volume, Pitch, iand Pan and if it is too loud or
soft.

Need to fade a song in or out? Need to to cross fade

from one song to another? Remember that Blender can
animate any block. This means that you can animate the
volume. Go to a frame where you want to start a fade
out, place your cursor over the Volume block and hit I
to insert a key, them move up in time, set the volume to
zero and hit I again over the block. You now have a
fade out.

RoboDude Asks: When I press the Play button or press Alt-A, why doesn't my
movie play at a consistent speed? It is difficult to run everything properly on the
screen. Transitions need to be calculated and audio added. You could try going
into User Preferences and the System tab to try to increase sequencer
memory. When you crunch the movie, it will play real-time.

After you have the video completed, it is time to animate the

sequence exactly like you would for any other movie made in
Blender. You may need to return to the Default screen layout
and set your render output file name/location. Finish by
pressing the Animation Button.

24-5
Chapter
Produce1-
a The Blender Interface
Movie
This is a great exercise to end
the book with. Your job is to
take all of the images and
movies you have created
through these exercises and
produce a compiled movie. I
recommend making a Black
JPEG image to use for your first
and last image (start and end
in black). Images should be
displayed for approx. 3-5
seconds with 1 second
transitions. When finished, go
back to the Default screen and
hit Animate.

** Call the instructor when finished**

Chapter 24 Reflection and Wrap-up:

Program Interfaces and User Reactions
You have just scratch the surface of what Blender can do and the
possibilities are limitless. The internet is a great place to find answers.

1. How pleased are you with the results of your final movie? What would you do
differently?

2. Out of all of the activities you did in Blender, what was your favorite and why?

3. Which activity was your least favorite and why?

4. Has this experience shaped your thoughts on any future career options? Explain your
answer.

5. Do you still look at movies that use animation in them the same way you did before
your Blender experience? Explain your answer.

24-6
 Chapter 25- 3D Printing Tools
3D printing (also called rapid prototyping) has become a hot topic in recent years. They
are great tools to bring your 3D designs into the real world and Blender can be a great
tool to use to design those ideas. There are many different 3D printing processes, but
the most common, and cheapest, system deposits thin layers of plastic onto a table.
Layers are typically around .25mm high with extruders squeezing plastic out of a hole
that is around .4mm in diameter. 3D printers were once very expensive, but have come
down in price in recent years where you can now buy good quality kits for as low as
$250-$350 that give you a nice build size. The RepRap.org movement is responsible for
bringing the costs down with a variety of
printer designs through their open-source
movement. If you are interested in building
your own 3D printer, on the same site as the
Blender Basics Book, you will see a page
dedicated to 3D Printing Resources where
I have pulled together resources from my
own experiences. I would also recommend
visiting www.reprap.org for all things open-
source 3D printing.

Fundamentals of 3D Printing
When designing 3D models for printing, there are several factors that must be
considered for successful results. You need to be aware of the build size limits of your
machine, units you wish to work with, building with or without supports, and making sure
the mesh is closed with no errors in the geometry. The process for 3D printing is as
follows:

1. Design your project in your favorite 3D modeling program (Blender, SolidWorks, etc.)
2. Convert the file to a .STL format. STL files are generic 3D model files used by many
programs.
3. Slice the file in a popular slicing program. Creates the individual layers for the printer.
4. Create the G-Code file in the slicing program for the 3D printer to read.
5. Print the part in your 3D printer. The process usually takes hours, depending on your
machine and part details.

25-1
Chapter
Chapter 1-
25-The
3DBlender
Printing Interface
Tools
Using Blender to Create 3D Printer Models
Almost any 3D design software can be used to create models for printing with Blender
being one of those tools. Blender is not the easiest program for designing models, but
with a little practice you can create just about anything. Programs like SolidWorks and
Inventor are easier because, as feature are added to the model, they are
automatically joined to the mesh, unlike Blender where you need to manually do all the
Boolean operations to join features. Also, measurement systems in Blender can prove to
be more of a challenge.
Remember that 3D printers work like hot
glue guns, only more precise and a lot
hotter. Molten plastic cannot suspend in
the air and needs some form of partial
support under each layer. Look at the
picture to the left for an example. While
angles greater than 45 degrees can be
achieved, keeping them at 45 degrees
or lesser will prove more successful.
The Manifold Mesh
One of the biggest problems that you will encounter with Blender more than in a
traditional CAD program is the non-manifold mesh. Basically, a non-manifold mesh is a
mesh that couldn't possibly exist in real life because of mistakes in geometry. There
could be holes where faces should be, or flipped faces, or double vertices, or
overlapping faces. Most Slicing programs will try to fix these, but sometimes the
problems are too bad to be fixed automatically. The best solution is to make a manifold
mesh from the beginning so things go well from start to finish.
Non-Manifold Mesh Non-Manifold Mesh This mesh
These meshed contains a hole
were joined and an
together so that overlapping face
they each still (triangle face
have their original overlaps the
geometry square face). Will
overlapping. Will not print.
not print.

Manifold Mesh Manifold Mesh

These meshed This mesh is
were joined closed with no
together using the double faces or
Boolean union vertices. All
feature, so a new faces are
mesh was created aligned and will
from the two. Fully print.
closed, no
overlap- will print.

25-2
 Chapter 25- 3D Printing Tools
Tools for Modeling
Blender has many tools to help you create the perfect model for 3D printing. The first
consideration is scaling and dimensioning. If you stick with proportion around the initial
Blender cube, your model will be about 2mm x 2mm x 2mm. That's a pretty small model.
In order to work with acceptable
measurements, you will need to open the
numeric side panel on your screen (the N
key). When creating objects, pay close
attention to the Dimensions panel. These
numbers represent millimeters. While most
slicing programs will allow you to scale your
model, it is best to work in real units as much
as possible.

Since you are now experts in using Blender after working through this book, you should
know these basic tools to help keep your model neat and clean:
Extrude command (3-6)
Remove Doubles (3-10)
Recalculating/Flipping Normals (3-8)
Boolean Modifier (3-18)
Adding Faces(3-17)
Spin Tool (revolved shapes) (20-4)

RoboDude Asks: What do I do if I want to cut a hole through a block?

To keep your mesh manifold, the best option would be to make a cylinder that
represents the hole, place it in your mesh in the correct location, then use a
Boolean modifier to subtract the cylinder from the mesh.

Working to keep your meshes manifold can be difficult at first, but as you become a
Blender Ninja, this will become easier.

Exporting Models
After you have completed your model and ready
to take it out of Blender to your slicing program,
there are a few more tools in Blender you will
want to use. Blender now has an add-on called
3D Print Toolbox that is full of useful tools to make
sure your mesh is good for printing and exporting.
To enable the 3D Print Toolbox, go to File and
User Preferences. In the Add-ons menu, find
the Mesh: 3D Print Toolbox option and enable it.
You will now see a tab called 3D Printing at the
bottom of your other tool shelf tabs on the left.

25-3
Chapter
Chapter 1-
25-The
3DBlender
Printing Interface
Tools
With the mesh selected, you
will see your tool options in the
3D Printing tool shelf tab. In this
example, we are using the
monkey head that has a lot of
problems. You will notice all of
the different errors that can be
detected in the panel and
their settings. For example,
most 3D printing recommends
that overhangs be kept under
45 degrees, but many times
that can be set to a higher
angle and still work. The
Check All button will detect
any problems and list them at
the bottom of the panel.

If you go into Edit Mode, the

errors will turn into buttons that
will highlight on the mesh for
you so you can fix them.

If you have a 3D printer with multiple extruder heads, or the ability to print in multiple
colors, The export feature in the 3D Printing tab can work well for that. When designing
a 3D model for printing that has several parts assembled for different colors (i.e. a name
plaque that uses one color part for the main part and another color part for the letters),
the parts need to be exported as .STL files that remember their exact locations in the
assembled models. To use the Export Path option in the tool shelf, follow these steps:

Set the Export Path to your saving location.

Select the Output file type (typically .STL).

Select a mesh and hit Export. The part should

export to your saving location with the file
and part name. Repeat the process for each part of the assembly. You are now ready
to take your files to your slicing program. We use Slic3r in our lab which is free and easy
to use. For more information about Slic3r, go to www.slic3r.org

25-4
 Creating a Chess Piece
For this simple activity, create a simple chess piece that could be 3D printed if you have
a printer available. The part could be a simple revolved or extruded pawn or something
more elaborate, like a rook, bishop, king, or queen. Want a bigger challenge?- design a
knight! If you have the time and the printer, why not make an entire chess set?

Pay close attention to the problems mentioned in the chapter. Your goal is to be able
to run your model through the 3D Printing tool shelf checks and come back with zero
errors in all categories (There may be some acceptable results, look for the bad ones).

When finished, export the part as an .STL file.

** Call the instructor when finished **

25-5
Chapter
Chapter 1-
25The Blender Interface
Reflection
Chapter 25 Reflection and Wrap-up:

3D Printing Design
3D printing has a bright future where they may become as popular as
paper printers are at home. Take a few moments to reflect on the unit.

1. Research www.reprap.org to learn more about the open source printer

movement. There have been many printer designs released through RepRap.
Which printers have you see in media or operation? If you were to build one for
yourself, which design would you choose and why? Explain.

2. Now that you have selected a possible 3D printer design, research the internet to
see if the printer is available as a kit. Popular sites to search are Ebay and
Amazon. What did you find? Are they expensive? Search for instructional pdf files
or YouTube videos for assembling the printer. Do they look hard to assemble?
Explain.

3. Research another type of 3D printing other than extruded plastic systems. What is
another type of 3D printing that has a bright future (you may find several) and
why do you think it has promise? Explain.

25-6
 Educational Standards Alignment
Academic Standards:

As educators, we need to evaluate the lessons we teach to make sure they align to
some form of accepted educational standards. This Blender manual is no different. Your
Blender lessons can tie together mathematical, technical, scientific, and
communication skills as the students learn the basics of 3D modeling and animation.
They can also work well in a STEM (Science, Technology, Engineering, and
Mathematics) curriculum. In an effort to demonstrate the many educational standards
that are addressed through these lessons, these charts have been developed using the
following federally accepted standards:

NSES Science Content Standards

NCTE Standards for the English Language Arts
ITEEA Standards for Technological Literacy
NCTM Standards and Expectations

These standard alignments can be found on the following pages.

National Science Education Standards Grades 6-8

Students will develop an understanding of:

UNIFYING CONCEPTS AND PROCESSES

Systems, order, and organization
Evidence, models, and explanation
Change, constancy, and measurement
Form and function
SCIENCE AS INQUIRY
Abilities necessary to do scientific inquiry
Understanding about scientific inquiry
PHYSICAL SCIENCE
Motion and forces
Transfer of energy
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Abilities of technological design
Understanding about science and technology
HISTORY AND NATURE OF SCIENCE
Science as a human endeavor
Understanding the nature of science
Source: National Science Education Standards

S-1
Chapter 1- The
Educational Blender Alignment
Standards Interface
National Council of Teachers of English Education Standards
Students will develop an understanding of:

Students adjust their use of spoken, written, and visual language (e.g., conventions, style,
vocabulary) to communicate effectively with a variety of audiences and for different purposes.
Students employ a wide range of strategies as they write and use different writing process
elements appropriately to communicate with different audiences for a variety of purposes.
Students conduct research on issues and interests by generating ideas and questions, and by
posing problems. They gather, evaluate, and synthesize data from a variety of sources (e.g.,
print and non-print texts, artifacts, people) to communicate their discoveries in ways that suit
their purpose and audience.
Students use a variety of technological and informational resources (e.g., libraries, databases,
computer networks, video) to gather and synthesize information and to create and
communicate knowledge.
Students use spoken, written, and visual language to accomplish their own purposes (e.g., for
learning, enjoyment, persuasion, and the exchange of information).
Source: National Council of Teachers of English and the International Reading Association

International Technology & Engineering Educators Association Standards

Students will develop an understanding of:

THE CHARACTERISTICS AND SCOPE OF TECHNOLOGY

New products and systems can be developed to solve problems or to help do things that could
not be done without the help of technology.
The development of technology is a human activity and is the result of individual or collective
needs and the ability to be creative.
Technology is closely linked to creativity, which has resulted in innovation.
THE CORE CONCEPTS OF TECHNOLOGY
Technological systems include input, process, output, and, at times, feedback.
Systems thinking involves considering how every part relates to others.
Technological systems can be connected to one another.
Requirements are the parameters placed on the development of a product or system.
Different technologies involve different sets of processes.
RELATIONSHIPS AMONG TECHNOLOGIES & THE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN TECHNOLOGY &
OTHER FIELDS OF STUDY
Technological systems often interact with one another.
Knowledge gained from other fields of study has a direct effect on the development of
technological products and systems.

S-2
 Educational Standards Alignment
International Technology & Engineering Educators Association Standards
Students will develop an understanding of:

THE CULTURAL, SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND POLITICAL EFFECTS OF TECHNOLOGY

Decisions about the use of products and systems can result in desirable or undesirable
consequences.
THE ATTRIBUTES OF DESIGN
Design is a creative planning process that leads to useful products and systems.
There is no perfect design.
Requirements for design are made up of criteria and constraints.
ENGINEERING DESIGN
Design involves a set of steps and can be performed in different sequences and repeated as
needed.
Brainstorming is a group problem-solving design process in which each person in the group
presents his or her ideas in an open forum.
Modeling, testing, evaluating, and modifying are used to transform ideas into practical
solutions.
THE ROLE OF TROUBLESHOOTING, RESEARCH & DEVELOPMENT, INVENTION &
INNOVATION, AND EXPERIMENTATION IN PROBLEM SOLVING
Invention is the process of turning ideas & imagination into devices and systems. Innovation is
the process of modifying an existing product or system to improve it.
Some technological problems are best solved through experimentation.
THE ABILITIES TO APPLY THE DESIGN PROCESS
Apply a design process to solve problems in and beyond the laboratory-classroom.
Specify criteria and constraints for the design.
Make two-dimensional and three-dimensional representations of the designed solution.
Test and evaluate the design in relation to pre-established requirements, such as criteria and
constraints, and refine as needed.
Make a product or system and document the solution.
THE ABILITY TO USE AND MAINTAIN TECHNOLOGICAL PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS
Use computers and calculators in various applications
Operate and maintain systems in order to achieve a given purpose.
SELECTION AND USE OF ENERGY AND POWER TECHNOLOGIES
Energy can be used to do work, using many processes.
Source: Standards for Technical Literacy, Third Edition, 2007

S-3
Chapter 1- The
Educational Blender Alignment
Standards Interface
National Council of Teachers of Mathematics Education Standards and
Expectations
Students will develop an understanding of:

NUMBERS AND OPERATIONS

Understand numbers, ways of representing numbers, relationships among numbers, and
number systems.
Understand meanings of operations and how they relate to one another.
Compute fluently and make reasonable estimates.
ALGEBRA
Understand patterns, relations, and functions
Use mathematical models to represent and understand quantitative relationships.
Analyze change in various contexts
GEOMETRY
Specify locations and describe spatial relationships using coordinate geometry and other
representational systems.
Use visualizations, spatial reasoning, and geometric modeling to solve problems.
MEASUREMENT
Understand measurable attributes of an object and the units, systems, and processes of
measurement.
Apply appropriate techniques, tools, and formulas to determine measurements.
DATA ANALYSIS AND PROBABILITY
Develop and evaluate inferences and predictions that are based on data.
PROCESS
Problem Solving:
Solve problems that arise in mathematics and in other contexts.
Apply and adapt a variety of appropriate strategies to solve problems.
Communications:
Communicate mathematical thinking coherently and clearly to peers, teachers, and others.
Use the language of mathematics to express mathematical ideas precisely.
Connections:
Recognize and apply mathematics in contexts outside mathematics.
Representation:
Create and use representations to organize, record, and communicate mathematical ideas
Create and use representations to organize, record, and communicate mathematical ideas
Source: Principles and Standards for School Mathematics

S-4
 Index
A______________________ D (cont.)_______________
Actors, physics 22-1 Duplicate, copy 3-7
Add-ons 1-3 Dynamic, actor 22-3
Animation, armatures 17-2
Animation, data blocks 10-7
Animation, in game 22-10
E______________________
Edit Mode 3-1; 3-5
Animation, viewing 10-3
Eliminating Doubles 3-10
Append 1-4; 1-5
Emission, particles 14-2
Armature 13-4; 17-1
Explode, modifier 14-7
Array 13-1
Export 1-6
Audio, video editing 24-5
Extrude 3-6
Auto Smooth 3-16
Extrude, curves 16-5
B______________________ F_______________________
Faces, adding 3-17; 3-21
Background Image (view) 3-20
Falloff (proportional Editing) 3-9
Background Images (world) 6-4
Field Weights, physics 14-3
Bolts 20-5
Fluid, physics 13-6;19-4
Boolean 3-18; 13-2
Fog (mist) 6-1; 6-6
Build, modifier 13-2

C______________________ G_______________________
Gears, command 20-3; 20-5
Camera, settings 7-1
GLSL Shading 23-3
Child-Parent Objects 15-1
Graph Editor 10-3; 10-6
Children, particles 14-3
Gravity 14-3; 22-2
Cloth, physics 13-6; 19-2
Green Screen (chromakey) 7-5
Collision, physics 13-6; 14-8
Constraints 16-1
Copy, constraint 16-1 H_______________________
Copy, duplicate 3-7 Hair, particles 14-9
Chromakey (greeen screen) 7-5 Halo, material 5-3
Cursor, 3D 1-1; 3-2 Hook, modifier 13-5
Curves 16-4
Cycles I_______________________
Background Images 6-8 Images, textures 5-7
Basic Description 4-3 Import 1-6
Depth-of-Field 7-4 Interpolation (animation) 10-5
Images 5-12 Inverse Kinematics 17-5
Lighting 4-5
Materials 4-5; 5-10 J_______________________
Mist 6-6 Joining 3-17
Particles 14-6
Speed Settings 4-8
K_______________________
Textures 5-11
Key framing 10-1
UV Mapping 23-2
Key framing, auto 10-2
World 6-5
Kinematics 17-5
Knife Tool 3-9
D______________________ Knife Project 3-9
Decimate, modifier 13-3
Deleting 3-17
L_______________________
Depth-of-Field 7-3
Lamps (lights) 7-7
Diffuse 4-2
Lighting, indirect 7-9
Displacement Mapping 5-9
Lights (lamps) -7
Dope Sheet 10-3; 10-4; 18-3
Locking, constraint 16-2
Double Vertices, Faces- Eliminating 3-10
Logic Blocks 22-6

Index
Chapter
Index 1- The Blender Interface
M_______________________ S (cont.)________________
Manipulator Widgets 2-2; 3-3 Screw, modifier 13-3
Materials 5-1 Select, box 3-5
Meshes, basic 3-1 Select, circle 3-5; 3-10
Meta Shapes 12-2 Separating 5-16
Mirror, animation curve 10-6 Sequence Editor 24-1
Mirror, material 9-2 Shading 2-2; 3-5
Mirror, modifier 13-3 Shadows 7-7; 9-1
Mist (fog) 6-1 Shadows, GLSL 23-4
Modes, drawing 2-2; 3-1 Shape Keys 18-1
Modifiers 13-1 Shrinkwrap, modifier 13-5
Motion Tracking 21-1 Smoke, physics 19-6
Movie, saving 8-4 Smooth, modifier 13-5
Multiple Selection 1-2 Snap 3-2; 15-2
Soft Body, physics 19-1
N_______________________ Specular 5-2
Nodes 7-2 Stars (world) 6-3
Normal Mapping 5-6; 5-18 Strand, materials 14-9
Numeric Input (transform) 3-3 Subdivide 3-8; 3-10
NURBS, lofting 12-1 Subdivision Surface, modifier 13-4

O_______________________ T_______________________
Object Mode 3-1 Text, 3D 11-1
Origin (pivot point) 3-7; 15-2 Text, curves 11-2
Texture Generators 5-5
Texture Mapping 5-8
P_______________________ Texture Unwrapping 23-1
Packing Data 1-5
Textures 5-4
Parent-Child Objects 15-1
Three-Dimensional Printing 25-1
Particle Mode 14-1
Time Mapping 22-6
Particles, physics 13-6; 14-1
Tool Shelf 2-2; 3-7
Paths 16-4
Track-To, constraint 3-13; 16-1
Physics Engine 22-1
Transform Widgets 2-2; 3-3
Pivot Points (origin) 3-7; 15-2
Transparency 5-2; 5-3; 9-2
Pose Mode 17-2
Primitive Meshes 3-2
Proportional Editing 3-9; 18-2 U_______________________
User Preferences 1-3
UV Texture Mapping 23-1
R_______________________
Ray Tracing 9-1 V_______________________
Record Physics 22-5
Vertex Groups 11-11; 19-2
Rendering 8-1
Vertex Groups, bone 17-4
Revolve, shapes 20-4
Video Editing 24-1
Rigid Body, actor 19-10; 22-3
Viewing Style 3-5
Rotation, constraint 16-1
Viewports (Windows) 1-2
Views, typical 2-4
S_______________________
Saving 1-4 W_______________________
Scale, time 22-6
Wave, modifier 13-5
Scene, settings 8-3
Weight Paint 14-11
Scolling 2-2
Windows (Viewports) 1-2
Screw, command 20-1
World Settings 6-1; 23-4

Index